wr2 Om Rev C

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 322

WAV E RU N N E R - 2

O P E R A T O R ’ S M A N UA L
J A N UA R Y 2 0 0 2
LeCroy Corporation
700 Chestnut Ridge Road
Chestnut Ridge, NY 10977-6499
Tel: (845) 578-6020, Fax: (845) 578-5985

Internet: General Information: http://www.lecroy.com


Software Utilities: http://www.lecroy.com/software

© 2002 by LeCroy Corporation. All rights reserved. Information in this publication supersedes all earlier
versions. Specifications subject to change.

LeCroy, ProBus and SMART Trigger are registered trademarks, and ActiveDSO, ScopeExplorer,
WaveAnalyzer and Waverunner are trademarks, of LeCroy Corporation. Centronics is a registered
trademark of Data Computer Corp. Epson is a registered trademark of Epson America Inc. Mathcad is a
registered trademark of MATHSOFT Inc. MATLAB is a registered trademark of The MathWorks, Inc.
Microsoft, MS and Microsoft Access are registered trademarks, and Windows and NT trademarks, of
Microsoft Corporation. PowerPC is a registered trademark of IBM Microelectronics. DeskJet, ThinkJet,
QuietJet, LaserJet, PaintJet, HP 7470 and HP 7550 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard
Company.

Manufactured under an ISO 9000 This electronic product is subject to


Registered Quality Management System disposal and recycling regulations
that vary by country and region.
Visit www.lecroy.com to view the Many countries prohibit the
certificate. disposal of waste electronic
equipment in standard waste
receptacles.
For more information about proper
disposal and recycling of your
LeCroy product, please visit
www.lecroy.com/recycle.

WR2-OM-E Rev C
T AB L E O F C O N T E N T S

IN TRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 1
Waverunner-2 Features… ................................................................................................................ 1
WAVEPILOT MENU ..............................................................................................................................................1
QUICK ZOOM.........................................................................................................................................................4
WAVEPILOT MENU GRAPH BUTTON .........................................................................................................5
Waveform History…........................................................................................................................ 8
DISPLAY SIGNAL CHANGE S OVER TIME .................................................................................................8
About This Manual.........................................................................................................................12
FIRST THIN GS .......................................................................................................... 15
When Your Waverunner-2 is Delivered… .......................................................................................15
CHECK THAT YOU HAVE E VERYTHING ................................................................................................15
BE SURE TO RE AD THIS WARRANTY .......................................................................................................15
TAKE ADVANTAGE OF MAINTE NANCE AGRE EMENTS ................................................................16
OBTAIN ASSISTANCE .......................................................................................................................................16
RETURN A PRODUCT FOR SERVICE OR REPAIR ................................................................................16
STAY UP-TO-DATE .............................................................................................................................................16

Installation for Safe and E fficient Operation .....................................................................18


SAFETY SYMBOLS ..............................................................................................................................................18
OPERATE IN A SAFE ENVIRONME NT .....................................................................................................19
AC POWER SOURCE ...........................................................................................................................................20
POWER AND GROUND CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................20
ON/ STANDBY SWITCH....................................................................................................................................20
POWER OFF STATE ............................................................................................................................................20
CALIBRATION ......................................................................................................................................................21
CLEANING.............................................................................................................................................................21
ABNORMAL CONDITIONS.............................................................................................................................21
Up and Running ............................................................................................................................ 22
GET TO KNOW YOUR WAVERUNNER-2 – FRONT PANEL ..............................................................22
INSTALL AND POWER UP...............................................................................................................................22
GET TO KNOW YOUR WAVE RUNNER-2 – BACK PANEL .................................................................23
INITIAL IZE ............................................................................................................................................................25
CHECK YOUR WAVERUNNER-2 SYSTE M ................................................................................................25
ADD AN OPTION................................................................................................................................................26
UPDATE TO THE LATEST FIRMWARE ......................................................................................................26
SAVE THE SCREE N (AND ENERGY)..........................................................................................................26
DO YOU PREFER YOUR CONTROLS WITH SOUND AND AUTO-REPE AT? .............................27

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 iii


T AB L E O F C O N T E N T S

PART O N E : GE T T I N G START E D .............................29


CHAPTE R ON E : CATCH A N E W WAVE ............................................................... 30
View Your Waveform...................................................................................................................... 31
USE TIME/ DIV TO ADJUST THE TIMEBASE ......................................................................................... 33
ADJUST SENSITIVITY AND POSITION..................................................................................................... 34
ZOOM AND SCROLL AUTOMATICALLY ................................................................................................. 34
USE THE POSITION AND ZOOM CONTROLS ...................................................................................... 36
SET UP THE TIME BASE ................................................................................................................................... 37
SET THE COUPLING......................................................................................................................................... 38
SET UP FOR CAL AND BNC SIGNALS .......................................................................................................39
CHAPTE R TWO: SIMPLY TRIGGER ..................................................................... 42
E dge Trigger on Simple Signals.....................................................................................................43
CONTROL TRIGGERING ................................................................................................................................ 43
SET UP AN EDGE TRIGGER ......................................................................................................................... 44
USE WINDOW TRIGGER ................................................................................................................................. 47
TRIGGER SOURCE ............................................................................................................................................. 48
OBTAIN A TRIGGER STATUS SUMMARY ................................................................................................ 49
CHAPTE R THRE E : DISPLAY YOUR SIGNAL ...................................................... 50
Display Persistence ........................................................................................................................ 51
VIEW SIGNAL CHANGES OVER TIME ..................................................................................................... 51
SET UP YOUR DISPLAY.................................................................................................................................... 52
SET UP FOR PERSISTE NCE ............................................................................................................................ 53
SET UP FOR PERSISTE NCE AND HISTORY USING ANALOG PERSIST BUTTON ................. 54
SET UP FOR HISTORY ...................................................................................................................................... 56
CHOOSE A GRID STYLE ................................................................................................................................. 58
Save and Recall Your Panel Setups.................................................................................................60
SAVE PANEL SETUPS ........................................................................................................................................ 60
RECALL PANEL SETUPS.................................................................................................................................. 61
CHAPTE R FOUR: CHOOSE A ME ASURE TOOL ................................................ 62
Cursors: Tools for Measuring Signal Values...................................................................................63
CURSORS AND PERSISTENCE ...................................................................................................................... 63
CURSORS IN XY DISPLAY............................................................................................................................... 64
WAVEPILOT........................................................................................................................................................... 65
Measure with Cursors ....................................................................................................................67
CONTROL THE TIME CURSORS .................................................................................................................. 67
CONTROL THE AMPLITUDE CURSORS................................................................................................... 68
Measure Automatically with Parameters........................................................................................72
CHOOSE A STANDARD PARAME TER .......................................................................................................73
TURN OFF CURSORS AND PARAMETERS............................................................................................... 74

iv ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

CHAPTE R FIVE : USE MATH TOOLS ....................................................................76


Make Math E asy............................................................................................................................ 77
SET UP TO DO WAVEFORM MATHEMATICS .........................................................................................78
USE A MATH TOOL ............................................................................................................................................79
PERFORM AN FFT OPERATION ..................................................................................................................80
DO SUMMED AVERAGING ............................................................................................................................83
Save and Recall Waveforms ........................................................................................................... 85
OBTAIN A WAVEFORM OR ME MORY STATUS REPORT ...................................................................87
CHAPTE R SIX: DOCUME N T YOUR WORK .........................................................88
Make a Hard Copy......................................................................................................................... 89
PRINT, PLOT, OR COPY....................................................................................................................................90
Manage Floppy or Card Files .........................................................................................................91
CUSTOMIZE FILE NAMES ..............................................................................................................................92
ADD A NE W DIRECTORY...............................................................................................................................93
COPY FILES ...........................................................................................................................................................94

PART T WO : L O O KI N G DE E PE R .............................. 99
CHAPTE R SE VE N : A QUE STION OF TIME BASE ............................................. 100
Choose a Sampling Mode............................................................................................................. 101
SINGLE-SHOT – WAVE RUNNER-2’S BASIC CAPTURE TE CHNIQUE .........................................101
RIS – FOR HIGHER SAMPLE RATE S .........................................................................................................102
ROLL – DISPLAY IN RE AL-TIME ................................................................................................................102
SEQUENCE – WORKING WITH SE GMENTS ........................................................................................103
PAIRING CHANNELS ......................................................................................................................................104
Use a Sampling Mode...................................................................................................................105
SET UP FOR SINGL E-SHOT OR RIS ..........................................................................................................105
SET UP FOR SEQUE NCE CAPTURE ..........................................................................................................106
OBTAIN A SE QUENCE STATUS SUMMARY...........................................................................................107
OR SAMPLE EXTERNALLY...........................................................................................................................108
CHAPTE R E IGHT: TRIGGER SMART ..................................................................110
Hold Off by Time or E vents ........................................................................................................ 111
HOLD OFF BY TIME ........................................................................................................................................111
HOLD OFF BY E VENTS .................................................................................................................................112
Trigger SMART ............................................................................................................................ 113
CATCH A GLITCH .............................................................................................................................................113
CAPTURE RARE PHENOMENA ..................................................................................................................117
TRIGGER ON INTERVALS ............................................................................................................................120
QUAL IFY A SIGNAL .........................................................................................................................................124
TRIGGER ON LOST SIGNALS .....................................................................................................................127
TRIGGER ON TV SIGNALS...........................................................................................................................130

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 v


T AB L E O F C O N T E N T S

PATTERN TRIGGER ........................................................................................................................................132


RUNT TRIGGER ................................................................................................................................................135
SLEW RATE TRIGGER ....................................................................................................................................136
CHAPTE R N IN E : DISPLAY MORE ......................................................................138
Transform Your Vision................................................................................................................. 139
“Paint” Your Display.................................................................................................................... 142
CHANGE YOUR PALETTE ............................................................................................................................143
Set Up XY Display........................................................................................................................ 146
CHAPTE R TE N : USE ADVAN CE D MATH TOOLS ............................................150
Compute E xtrema Waveforms ..................................................................................................... 151
Rescale and Assign Units............................................................................................................. 153
E nhance Resolution..................................................................................................................... 154
Do More with FFT ....................................................................................................................... 158
DO FFT AVERAGE ............................................................................................................................................158
DO ADDITIONAL PROCESSING ...............................................................................................................158
USE CURSORS WITH FFT ..............................................................................................................................158
SET FFT SPAN .....................................................................................................................................................161
Use an Advanced Math Function................................................................................................. 163
Resample to Deskew.................................................................................................................... 164
Plot Trends................................................................................................................................... 165
READ TRE NDS...................................................................................................................................................167
CHAPTE R E L E VE N : ANALYZE WITH PARAME TERS .....................................170
Use Custom Parameters............................................................................................................... 171
CUSTOMIZE A PARAME TER .......................................................................................................................172
Test for Pass and Fail ................................................................................................................... 173
SET UP A PASS/ FAIL TEST ............................................................................................................................173
PASS/ FAIL TEST ON A MASK ......................................................................................................................174
MAKE A WAVEFORM MASK ........................................................................................................................175
CHANGE A TEST ACTION............................................................................................................................175
Choose a Parameter...................................................................................................................... 179
CHAPTE R TWE LVE : USE WAVE RUN N E R-2 WITH PC ....................................188
Transfer Data and Images to PC.................................................................................................. 189
EXPLORE YOUR SCOPE ................................................................................................................................190
MONITOR YOUR REMOTE CONTROL OPERATIONS.....................................................................191
Save Waveforms in ASCII ............................................................................................................. 192
SAVE IN AN ASCII FORMAT.........................................................................................................................193
Use ASCII Formats ...................................................................................................................... 195
SAVE TO SPREADSHE ET...............................................................................................................................195
PLOT A WAVEFORM IN SPREADSHE ET ................................................................................................198
USE MATHCAD ..................................................................................................................................................199

vi ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

USE MATLAB.......................................................................................................................................................201

PART T H R E E : WAVA O PT I O N ................................203


CHAPTE R THIRTE E N : PARAME TERS AN D OVE RVIEW............................... 204
A Valuable Tool for Waveform Analysis........................................................................................205
SET UP FOR HISTOGRAMS...........................................................................................................................205
PARAMETER MATH .........................................................................................................................................211
CHAPTE R FOURTE E N : MAKIN G HISTOGRAMS............................................. 217
Create and View a Histogram.......................................................................................................217
SETTING BINNING AND SCAL E ...............................................................................................................223
CHOOSING HISTOGRAM PARAMETERS ...............................................................................................226
USING MEASURE ME NT CURSORS ...........................................................................................................227
ZOOMING SEGMENTE D TRACES............................................................................................................229
CHAPTE R FIFTE E N : HOW HISTOGRAMS WORK ........................................... 231
Theory of Operation ....................................................................................................................231
DSO PROCESS.....................................................................................................................................................232
PARAMETER BUFFER .....................................................................................................................................232
CAPTURE OF PARAMETER E VE NTS .......................................................................................................233
HISTOGRAM PARAMETERS .........................................................................................................................233
ZOOM TRACES AND SEGME NTED WAVEFORMS ............................................................................234
HISTOGRAM PEAKS........................................................................................................................................234
BINNING AND MEASUREME NT ACCURACY......................................................................................235
CHAPTE R SIXTE E N : HISTOGRAM PARAME TE RS ......................................... 237
avg ................................................................................................................................................237
fwhm.............................................................................................................................................238
fwxx ..............................................................................................................................................239
hampl............................................................................................................................................240
Hbase ...........................................................................................................................................241
high...............................................................................................................................................242
hmedian........................................................................................................................................243
hrms..............................................................................................................................................244
htop...............................................................................................................................................245
low ................................................................................................................................................246
maxp.............................................................................................................................................247
mode.............................................................................................................................................248
pctl................................................................................................................................................249
pks ................................................................................................................................................250
range.............................................................................................................................................252
sigma ............................................................................................................................................253
totp................................................................................................................................................254
xapk ..............................................................................................................................................255

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 vii


T AB L E O F C O N T E N T S

PART F O U R : E T H E R N E T O PT I O N
CHAPTE R SE VE N TE E N : OVE RVIE W .................................................................258
Introduction .................................................................................................................................259
IMPLE ME NTATION STANDARD ..............................................................................................................259
CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................................................ 259
ScopeExplorer....................................................................................................................................................... 260
ActiveDSO............................................................................................................................................................. 261
EXAMPLE SYNTAX ......................................................................................................................................... 262
CHAPTE R E IGHTE E N : CON N E CTIN G TO PC OR N E TWORK.....................264
Connecting the Waverunner-2 to its Host ....................................................................................265
SCOPE RE AR PANEL ......................................................................................................................................265
PC REQUIRE MENTS ....................................................................................................................................... 266
ETHERNET CONNECTION ........................................................................................................................ 266
CONFIGURING THE WAVE RUNNER-2 TO COMMUNICATE WITH A PC CONNECTED
TO THE NETWORK ........................................................................................................................................ 267
CONFIGURING A PC THAT IS NOT CONNECTED TO THE NETWORK ............................... 268
MAKING PHYSICAL CONNECTION ....................................................................................................... 270
VERIFYING CONNECTION ........................................................................................................................ 266
NETWORK CONNECTION .......................................................................................................................... 272
CHANGING IP ADDRESS............................................................................................................................. 273
CHAPTE R N IN E TE E N : SOFTWARE TOOLS .....................................................274
Introduction to Software Tools.....................................................................................................275
ActiveDSO............................................................................................................................................................. 275
ScopeExplorer....................................................................................................................................................... 275
Using ActiveDSO .........................................................................................................................275
CONTROL INSTANTIATION....................................................................................................................... 275
EXAMPLE: PowerPoint ..................................................................................................................................... 276
EXAMPLE: VBA ................................................................................................................................................. 280
Using ScopeE xplorer ................................................................................................................... 281
ScopeExplorer FE ATURES............................................................................................................................... 282
APPE N DIX: SPE CIFICATION S .............................................................................283
Specifications.......................................................................................................................................283
MODELS ...............................................................................................................................................................283

ACQUISITION SYSTE M ....................................................................................................................283


TIMEBASE SYSTEM..........................................................................................................................................284
TRIGGERING SYSTE M ...................................................................................................................................285

viii ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

SMART TRIGGER TYPES ...............................................................................................................................285


AUTOSETUP ........................................................................................................................................................286
PROBES..................................................................................................................................................................286
COLOR WAVEFORM DISPLAY.....................................................................................................................286
ANALOG PERSISTENCE DISPLAY ............................................................................................................286
ZOOM EXPANSION TRACES .......................................................................................................................286
RAPID SIGNAL PROCESSING......................................................................................................................287
INTERNAL WAVEFORM MEMORY............................................................................................................287
SETUP STORAGE...............................................................................................................................................287
MATH TOOLS .....................................................................................................................................................287
ME ASURE TOOLS .............................................................................................................................................288
STANDARD MEASURE TOOLS ...................................................................................................................288
EXTENDED MATH AND MEASUREMENTS OPTION ......................................................................288
WAVE ANALYZER OPTION ..........................................................................................................................288
SPECIAL APPLICATION SOLUTIONS ......................................................................................................289
INTERFACE ..........................................................................................................................................................289
OUTPUTS ..............................................................................................................................................................289

GENERAL...............................................................................................................................................289

GLOSSARY OF TE CHN ICAL TE RMS .................................................................. 293

IN DE X....................................................................................................................... 305

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 ix


T AB L E O F C O N T E N T S

BLANK PAGE

x ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


I N T R O D U C T I O N

Waverunner-2 Features
ACCE SS YOUR SCOPE ’S AN ALYTICAL POWE R WITH THE PRE SS OF A BUTTON
Wavepilot Menu
In the Waverunner-2 series of scopes, LeCroy introduces the Wavepilot menu, an operational aid that gives you
immediate access to the digital storage oscilloscope’s (DSO) most frequently used functions. The Wavepilot
menu’s soft keys access measurement tools such as cursors and parameters. By means of the Graph button, it
also provides direct access to math analysis functions including histograms, fast Fourier transforms (FFT), and
the unique JitterTrack™ timing analysis. Finally, you can access application-specific analysis options like
communications mask testing, disk drive, and power measurements by pressing the Analysis Packages button.
The figure below shows the location of the Wavepilot and other new buttons.

QUICK ZOOM

L ocationof Wavepilot controls

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 1


I n t r o d u c t i o n

The figure below is an example of the Wavepilot Parameters function. Shown is a view of the measurement
Dashboard, which provides a summary of 26 key waveform parameters for the selected waveform.

A Wavepilot Measure menushowingthe measurement parameter Dashboard

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


2
WAVE RUN N E R-2

Pressing the Wavepilot menu’s Cursor button immediately displays the cursor control menu shown below. This
greatly enhances the accessibility of this frequently used function.

Wavepilot Cursors menuaccessedby pressingthe Cursors button

UTILITY

You can make cursors appear thin or thick by pressing , then selecting Special Modes →

Cursors Measure. Turn on or off.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


3
I n t r o d u c t i o n

QuickZoom

QuickZoom, indicated by the magnifying glass icon , is used to immediately turn on the zoom display of
the currently used acquisition channels. The figure below provides an example of a typical QuickZoom display.
The QuickZoom menu includes controls for overlapping the traces and using Auto-scroll to scan through the
expanded display.

A QuickZoomdisplay for asingle trace

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


4
WAVE RUN N E R-2

Wavepilot Menu Graph Button


Waveform analysis can be thought of as a multidimensional view of a signal. Oscilloscopes have always been
used to view signals in the time domain — a plot of signal amplitude versus time. More recently, frequency
domain analysis using the fast Fourier transform (FFT) has been added to digital oscilloscopes. The FFT
provides a graphical display of signal amplitude as a function of frequency. Using histograms, LeCroy offers
two new views of statistical and timing analysis using the unique TrackView function. TrackView plots
variations in timing parameters, such as period, width, frequency, and duty cycle, as a function of time.
These powerful analysis tools have been made even more accessible using the GRAPH function. Simply pressing
the GRAPH button in Wavepilot evokes a special graph menu that offers an instant selection of Histograms,
FFT, TrackView (with EMM option), and other options from additionally installed programs.

The Wavepilot Graph functionoffers aninstant choice of histogram, JitterTrack, TrackV iew, or FFT analysis of anacquired
signal, dependingoninstalledoptions

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


5
I n t r o d u c t i o n

The figure on the preceding page shows the statistical analysis of a pulse-width-modulated signal displayed with
Analog Persistence. This is used to show the waveform’s history. The histogram shows that there are nine
widths and that the frequency of occurrence of each pulse width varies proportional to the width. The next
question that one might ask is, "What is the ordering of the pulse widths?" That question is easily answered by
selecting the JitterTrack view. The figure below shows an analysis of pulse width as a function of time. The
JitterTrack display shows that the pulse widths increase sequentially, from narrowest to widest, with the
duration of the signal at each width increasing proportionally to the width.

JitterTrack example

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


6
WAVE RUN N E R-2

The final view shown below is the FFT of the pulse-modulated waveform. The FFT shows that the frequency
spectrum of the waveform consists of the 1 MHz fundamental frequency along with a series of harmonics.
Modulation effects are obvious in the sidebands shown about each of the principal spectral lines.

FFT of apulse-width modulatedsignal takenover one cycle of the width modulation


For additional controls or for manual setup, each of these analysis tools is available from the "Math Tools"
menu.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


7
I n t r o d u c t i o n

WAVE FORM HISTORY


Display Signal Changes Over Time
Analog Persistence and History mode are tools used to acquire and display how a signal changes over time.
These features work in a highly integrated fashion to produce screen displays that show the range and
frequency of occurrence of variations in the signal.
The LeCroy Waverunner-2 series of oscilloscopes place both these features at your fingertips. Both features
ANALOG
PERSIST

can be evoked by simply pressing . The figure below shows an intensity-graded Analog Persistence
display that contains 15 overlaid acquisitions of the leading edge of a pulse waveform. The intensity grading
indicates frequency of occurrence of each edge rate. Included are the time stamps for each acquisition.
The History data is displayed on trace D. Turn on trace D to view the data. When you turn off History mode,
turn trace D off manually.

The A nalogPersist buttongives access tothe History feature. History evokes sequence mode andA nalogPersistence to showa
history of waveformchanges.

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


8
WAVE RUN N E R-2

Turningoff A nalogPersistence allows each segment tobe viewedindividually. Play andReverse menuselections control auto-
scrollingthrough all segments
Sequence mode (available in the Timebase SETUP menus) breaks the long acquisition memory of the
oscilloscope into as many as 8000 smaller segments. Each of these segments is available after the acquisition
for individual viewing, parameter measurements, or waveform math. And each segment is individually time
stamped with an absolute real time stamp, time since first trigger, and time between segments.
In this example we can see a single edge that has a slow transition time. Each of the acquired segments can be
viewed individually by using the oscilloscope’s zoom feature. With Analog Persistence turned on, the scope
displays all the segments overlapped. If Analog Persistence is turned off, the zoom display shows each segment
individually. An auto-scrolling feature allows you to automatically scan through all the segments using Play and
Reverse. This allows any segment located using the Analog Persistence display to be recovered for detailed
analysis.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


9
I n t r o d u c t i o n

Once such an anomaly is observed it is easy to measure the risetime, using cursors or measurement parameters,
then select a trigger to catch only events with slow rise times. This type of event can be isolated using the Slew
Rate trigger (available with the advanced trigger package option), whose setup is shown in the following figure.

Setup for SlewRate trigger toacquire waveforms with transitiontimes greater than1.4 ns
Once the special slew rate trigger has been enabled, running the acquisition again measures the precise time of
occurrence of each of the slow transition events. This is illustrated in the following figure.

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


10
WAVE RUN N E R-2

Rerunningasequence acquisitionafter turningonSMA RT Trigger shows the time of occurrence of each slowedge event
The History button consolidates the existing Analog Persistence and sequence mode features and makes both
easily accessible through a direct front panel control.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


11
I n t r o d u c t i o n

About this Manual


Like the Waverunner-2 scope itself, this manual is designed to make your measurements as easy as “1–2–3.”
Each section shows you step by step how to use the oscilloscope to solve simple or complex problems.
Use the manual with the Waverunner-2 in front of you. Then you’ll see clearly just what is being referred to;
and you can immediately put into action what is described.
The manual has two main parts:
Part One, “G et t ing St ar t ed,” is for new users and basic operations. It explains the most important
Waverunner-2 features, and shows you how to apply them. Use it when starting out and for getting quick
results.
Part Two, “L ooking D eeper,” goes into more detail. It explains how to perform complex measurements
using more advanced Waverunner-2 functions. It also looks more deeply into operations covered in Part One.
Use it for tackling demanding tasks, or as a reference for understanding better how your scope works.
Consult the glossary for clarification of oscilloscope and related terms.
As an additional guide, each chapter is prefaced by a summary of its contents.
Watch for panels and sections throughout the manual marked by these icons:

T IPs offer additional hints on how to get the most out of Waverunner-2 actions or features.

N OT E s bring to your attention important information you should know.

The sections marked by the magnifying glass, and printed in italic text, “zoom” on particular
topics. They offer more information on the subject, where appropriate.

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


12
WAVE RUN N E R-2

BLANK PAGE

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


13
F I R ST T H IN GS . . . First
In this preface, see how
To make sure you have everything
To operate with safety
To get to know your Waverunner-2 scope
To install and power up
To initialize
To check the system status
To install new software and firmware
To activate the screen saver
To use menus, menu buttons and knobs
To choose button and knob preferences

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

14
F I R S T T H I N G S

WhenYourWaverunner-2is Delivered
CHE CK THAT YOU HAVE E VE RYTHIN G
First, verify that all items on the packing list or invoice copy have been shipped to you. (The items are also
listed below.) Second, check the SYSTEM STATUS display once your Waverunner-2 oscilloscope is installed
(see page 25). Contact your nearest LeCroy customer service center or national distributor if anything is
missing or damaged. If there is something missing or damaged, and you do not contact us immediately, we
cannot be responsible for replacement.
The following is shipped with the standard Waverunner-2 scope:
10:1 10 MΩ PP006 Passive Probe — one per channel N OT E : The warranty below replaces all
other warranties, expressed or implied,
AC Power Cord and Plug including but not limited to any implied
Performance or Calibration Certificate warranty of merchantability, fitness, or
adequacy for any particular purpose or
Front Scope Cover use. LeCroy shall not be liable for any
Operator’s Manual special, incidental, or consequential
damages, whether in contract or
Remote Control Manual otherwise. The customer is responsible
Quick Reference Guide for the transportation and insurance
charges for the return of products to
Declarationof Conformity the service facility. LeCroy will return
all products under warranty with
transport prepaid.

BE SURE TO RE AD THIS WARRAN TY


The Waverunner-2 oscilloscope is warranted for normal use and operation, within specifications, for a
period of three years from shipment. LeCroy will either repair or, at our option, replace any product
returned to one of our authorized service centers within this period. However, in order to do this we
must first examine the product and find that it is defective due to workmanship or materials and not
due to misuse, neglect, accident, or abnormal conditions or operation.
Spare and replacement parts, and repairs, all have a 90-day warranty.
The oscilloscope’s firmware has been thoroughly tested and is presumed to be functional.
N evertheless, it is supplied without warranty of any kind covering detailed performance. Products not
made by LeCroy are covered solely by the warranty of the original equipment manufacturer.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 15


F I R ST T H IN GS

TAKE ADVAN TAGE OF MAIN TE N AN CE AGRE E ME N TS


We offer a variety of services under the heading of Maintenance Agreements. These give extended warranty
and allow you to budget maintenance costs after the initial three-year warranty has expired. Installation,
training, enhancements, and on-site repairs — among other services — are available through special
supplemental support agreements. Inquire at your LeCroy customer service center or national distributor.

OBTAIN ASSISTAN CE
Help with installation, calibration, and the use of your Waverunner-2 scope in a range of applications is also
available from your customer service center.

RE TURN A PRODUCT FOR SE RVICE OR RE PAIR


T IP: If you need to return
If you do need to return a LeCroy product, identify it by its model and your scope, use the original
serial numbers (see page 25). Describe the defect or failure, and provide shipping carton. If this is not
your name and contact number. possible, the carton used
should be rigid. The scope
For factory returns, use a Return Authorization Number (RAN), should be packed so that it is
obtainable from customer service. Attach it so that it can be clearly seen on surrounded by a minimum of
the outside of the shipping package to ensure rapid forwarding within four inches (10 cm) of shock
LeCroy. absorbent material.
Return those products requiring only maintenance to your customer
service center.

Within the warranty period, transportation charges to the factory will be your responsibility, while products
under warranty will be returned to you with transport prepaid by LeCroy. Outside the warranty period, you will
have to provide us with a purchase order number before the work can be done. You will be billed for parts and
labor related to the repair work, as well as for shipping.
You should prepay return shipments. LeCroy cannot accept COD (Cash On Delivery) or Collect Return
shipments. We recommend using air freight.

STAY UP-TO-DATE
To maintain your Waverunner-2 scope’s performance within specifications, have us calibrate it at least once a
year. LeCroy offers state-of-the-art technology by continually refining and improving the instrument’s
capabilities and operation. We frequently update both firmware and software during service, free of charge
during warranty.
You can also install new firmware yourself, without the need of a factory refit. Simply provide us with your
Waverunner-2 serial number and ID, and the version number of the software already installed (see page 25),
along with ordering information. We will provide you with a unique option key that has a code to be entered
through the instrument’s front panel to upgrade your software. In addition, the very latest versions of LeCroy’s
unique oscilloscope software applications can be downloaded from the Internet, free of charge. Included are
ScopeExplorer and ActiveDSO.

16 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

ScopeE xplorer is a highly practical PC-based connectivity tool that interfaces Waverunner-2 to a PC that is
running Microsoft Windows, via the rear panel GPIB (IE EE 488) or RS-232 port. Specially designed by
LeCroy for its oscilloscopes, ScopeExplorer allows you to perform data and image transfers and other remote
operations from scope to PC with just a few keyboard strokes or mouse clicks. See Chapter 12, “U se
Waver unner- 2 wit h P C ,” for more about using ScopeExplorer with your Waverunner-2 scope.

S copeE xplorer now has a virtual front panel to allow full control of remote scopes.

ActiveDSO works on any PC running Windows 95, 98 or NT, and enables you to exchange data with a
variety of Windows applications or programming languages that support the ActiveX standard, such as MS
Office, Internet Explorer, Visual Basic, Visual C+ + and Visual Java. ActiveDSO hides the intricacies of
programming for each of these interfaces and provides a simple and consistent interface to the controlling
application. You can also visually embed ActiveDSO in any OLE automation compatible client and use it
manually without programming. You could, for example, generate a report by importing scope data straight
into Excel or Word, analyze your waveforms by bringing them directly into MathCad, archive measurement
results “on the fly” in a Microsoft Access database, and automate tests using Visual Basic, Java, C+ + , or
Excel (VBA).
Visit our Web site at http:/ / www.lecroy.com/ software to download these and other free software applications.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 17


F I R ST T H IN GS

InstallationforSafe and Efficient Operation


Safety Symbols
Where the following symbols or indications appear on the instrument’s front or rear panels, or elsewhere in this
manual, they alert you to important safety considerations.

Symbol Meaning
Incorrect operation or failure to heed warnings may result in death or serious
WARN IN G injury. If a WARN IN G is indicated on the instrument, do not proceed until its
conditions are understood and met.
Incorrect operation or failure to heed cautions may result in injury or damage to
CAUTION equipment. If a CAUTION is indicated, do not proceed until its conditions are
understood and met.
Refer to accompanying documents (for safety related information).
See elsewhere in this manual wherever the symbol is present, as indicated in the Table of
Contents.

Risk of E lectric Shock

Stand-by (Power) State

E arth (Ground) Terminal

Protective Conductor Terminal

Alternating Current Only

Chassis Terminal

E arth (Ground) Terminal on BN C Connectors

18 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

OPE RATE IN A SAFE E N VIRON ME N T


N ote: The Waverunner-2 has been qualified to the
The Waverunner-2 is intended for indoor use only. following E N 61010-1category:
Ensure that its operating environment will be
maintained within these parameters: Protection Class ..........................................I
Installation (Overvoltage) Category ...........II
Pollution Degree.........................................2
Temperature ............. 5 to 45 ºC
Humidity................... 80% max. RH (non-
condensing) up to 35 ºC CAUTION
Derates to 50% max. RH at Do not block the air inlet or exit ports.
45 ºC
Altitude...................... 4500 m up to 25 ºC
Derates to 2000 m max. at
45 ºC

CAUTION
Do not allow any foreign matter to enter the
Waverunner-2 through air inlet ports, etc.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 19


F I R ST T H IN GS

AC POWE R SOURCE
N ote: The Waverunner-2 automatically adapts
The Waverunner-2 operates from a single-phase itself to the line voltage present within the
100–120 V (± 10%) AC (~ ) power source at following limits:
50/ 60/ 400 (± 10%) Hz, or 200–240 V (± 10%) AC (~ )
at 50/ 60 (± 10%) Hz. Voltage
Range: 100 – 120 VAC 200 – 240 VAC
Maximum power consumption: 250 VA (depending on
model) Frequency
Range: 50/ 60/ 400 Hz 50/ 60 Hz
No manual voltage selection is required because the
instrument automatically adapts to the line voltage.

POWE R AN D GROUN D CON N E CTION S


The Waverunner-2 is provided with a 3-wire electrical
cord containing a 3-terminal polarized plug for line WARNING
voltage and safety ground connection. The plug’s Maintain the ground line to avoid electric shock.
ground terminal is connected directly to the frame of The power cord’s protective grounding conductor
the Waverunner-2. For adequate protection against must be connected to ground.
electrical hazard, this plug must be inserted into a
mating outlet containing a safety ground contact.
N ote: Set the power switch to STANDBY before
connecting or disconnecting the power cord.

ON / STAN DBY SWITCH


The On/ Standby toggle switch controls the basic operational state of the DSO. A portion of the DSO will
remain powered in the standby state (5 Watts dissipation).

POWE R OFF STATE


The DSO can only be placed in a complete power off state by unplugging the DSO’s power cord from the
primary power source (AC outlet). It is recommended that the DSO’s power cord be unplugged from the AC
outlet during any extended period of DSO inactivity.

20 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

CALIBRATION
The recommended calibration interval is one year. Calibration should be performed only by qualified personnel.
CLE AN IN G
Clean only the exterior of the instrument, using a
WARN IN G
damp, soft cloth. Do not use chemicals or abrasive
elements. Under no circumstances allow moisture to N o operator serviceable components inside. Do
penetrate the Waverunner-2. To avoid electric shock, not remove covers.
disconnect the instrument from the power supply
before cleaning.
ABN ORMAL CON DITION S
Operate the Waverunner-2 only as intended by the WARN IN G
manufacturer.
Any use of the instrument in a manner not
Do not operate the Waverunner-2 with covers specified by the manufacturer may impair the
removed. If you suspect the Waverunner-2 is damaged instrument’s safety protection. The Waverunner-2
or has failed, immediately set the power switch to has not been designed to make direct
STANDBY and disconnect the power cord. Refer measurements on the human body. N ever
servicing to qualified personnel. connect the Waverunner-2 to a living person.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the maximum specified input
terminal (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, E XT) voltage
levels.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 21


F I R ST T H IN GS

Up and Running
GE T TO KN OW YOUR WAVE RUN N E R-2 – FRON T PAN E L
MENU CONTROLS FLOPPY DISK DRIVE TIMEBASE CONTROLS

TRIGGER
CONTROLS

ZOOM & MATH


CONTROLS

ANALOG
WAVE PILOT PERSISTENCE
MENU ACCESS

SCREEN SAVER CAL


MODE LED

Waverunner-2 main front panel controls and features.

IN STALL AN D POWE R UP
1. Before powering up, check that the local power source corresponds to Waverunner-2’s power range (see
page 20).

2. Use the cable provided to connect the scope to the power outlet through its rear panel receptacle (see next
page).

3. Turn the scope on by pressing the On button at the bottom left-hand corner of the Waverunner-2 front
panel (see above).

22 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

Before a display appears, the instrument will automatically perform hardware and software self-tests, followed
by a full system calibration. The front panel STANDBY L ED will be lit during this sequence. The full testing
procedure will take about 10 seconds, after which a display appears.
UTILITY

4. Press to display the UTILITIES menus.

5. Press the menu soft key for to set the time and date.

GE T TO KN OW YOUR WAVE RUN N E R-2 – BACK PAN E L

ETHERNET

RS232-C CENTRONICS EXERNAL PC MEMORY CARD GPIB


MONITOR

BNC
SIGNAL
OUTPUT

U se the R S -232-C and G PI B ports to connect your Waverunner-2 scope to a computer or terminal,
the external monitor port to display your waveforms on another monitor, and the C entronics port
to connect compatible printers or other devices. U se the PC Card slot for the PC M emory Card and
portable H ard D isk options, and the BN C out put for external clock signals.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 23


F I R ST T H IN GS

T O N AV I G A T E T H R O U G H M E N U S

Menus such as enable you to perform actions or adjust settings.

The menu button beside each displayed menu controls that menu.

L onger menus that span the breadth of two buttons are controlled by both buttons.

Capitalized menus — for example — perform specific actions.

The two menu knobs work together with the two menu buttons beside them.

Combinations of knobs and buttons control continuously adjustable variables. T he button selects
or changes the variable, while the k nob adjusts its value.

Menus are grouped and shown together according to their function. Press a button or turn a k nob to
select a particular menu or an item on a menu. T ravel up or down in the menu list and change the
selection. Or change values and settings.
PANELS

The darker, labeled buttons also play a role in menu selection: — for example — was used
to select the menus for initialization. W hen you press any one of these, it offers access to related
menus in its group.

Menus with shadows lead to other menus: Press their buttons to display those others.

Press to return to a shadowed menu. A lso use this button whenever you wish to go back to
the previous menu display.

Arrows on the side of a long menu indicate that you can scroll up or down the menu list.
Press one or the other of these menus’ buttons to move in the desired direction, and to view or select
any menu item not displayed. A rrows disappear when you reach the beginning or end of the menu
list.

24 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

IN ITIALIZE
Initialize your Waverunner-2 scope to its basic default waveform display settings:

PANELS

6. Press to display the PANEL SETUPS menu group.

7. If Recall is not selected, press the button once to select it:

8. Then press the button beside .

Initialize to Waverunner-2 default settings whenever you wish to clear your settings and make a fresh start on a
new measurement.

CHE CK YOUR WAVE RUN N E R-2 SYSTE M


SCOPE
STATUS

9. Press to show the STATUS menus.

10. Press the top button to highlight and select System. The screen will show your Waverunner-2’s serial
number, the version of software installed and the date of its release, as well as a full list of your currently
installed software and hardware.

Contact LeCroy customer service immediately if any of the options you ordered have not been installed.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 25


F I R ST T H IN GS

ADD AN OPTION

This menu will also be displayed when you select System:

Use it to install new options — without the need to return your Waverunner-2 for a refit.

1. Press that menu’s button to display

2. Then press that menu’s button to display the ADD OPTION menus. Use them whenever you wish to add
a Waverunner-2 option by means of a special code. Contact your LeCroy sales or service center to obtain
the code.

UPDATE TO THE L ATE ST FIRMWARE


Your Waverunner-2 comes with the latest firmware installed. But to take advantage of our continuous
improvement, contact us to obtain a floppy disk or card containing the latest firmware. Then use these menus
to install it:

UTILITY

1. Press to display the UTILITIES menus.

2. Press the button for , then for the one for .

3. Place the floppy or card in the Waverunner-2 and press the buttons to select Floppy or Card and then
Update Flash. The newly installed firmware will appear on the System Status screen (see above).
You may also download the firmware from the internet, using ScopeExplorer.

SAVE THE SCRE E N (AN D E N E RGY)


Enable or disable your Waverunner-2’s screen saver:

DISPLAY

1. Press to show the DISPLAY SE TUP menus.

2. Press the button for “More Display Setup” to access this menu:

26 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Waverunner-2

3. Press its button, then select Yes or N o from

When enabled, the built-in screen saver is activated 10 minutes after the last use of a front panel control. This
is a complete display shutdown of the internal screen — an “Energy-Saver.” The front panel LED light will
indicate when the scope is in the screen-saving STANDBY state. Press any front panel button to restore the
screen.

DO YOU PRE FE R YOUR CON TROLS WITH SOUN D AN D AUTO-RE PE AT?


Have your buttons and knobs repeat their actions and make an audible sound when used:

UTILITY

1. Press to display the UTILITIES menus. These you will find useful for a variety of functions.

2. Press the button for , then the button for .

3. Make your preferences by means of the USER PREF’S menus displayed.

With Pushbutton auto-repeat On, all front panel buttons, when pressed and held in, will move the selection
automatically and sequentially through all items in a menu.
With audible feedback for buttons and knobs On, an audible “click” will sound when any front panel button is
pressed or any knob is turned.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 27


F I R ST T H IN GS

BLANK PAGE

28 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


P AR T O N E

GE T T I N G ST AR T E D
This part of the manual covers the main Waverunner-2 features and explains, step by step, how to use
them. You’ll get to know your scope and start working with it quickly and effectively. Capture and view
waveforms. Zoom and scroll. Learn the art of display. Use math and measurement tools. Document
your work.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 29


C H APT E R O N E : Catch a New Wave
In this chapter, see how
To select the input signal channel
To use menus and controls for basic operations
To find your way around the display
To adjust the timebase, gain and position of the signal
To zoom — manually and automatically
To set up the timebase
To set signal coupling
To calibrate and use the passive probe
To set up the CAL and BN C outputs

30 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R O N E Catch a N ew Wave

ViewYourWaveform
Take these steps to capture and view your signal; set time and volts per division; zoom and auto-scroll:

1. Connect your signal to the Waverunner-2 (Channel 1 input for this example).
AUTO
SETUP
2. Press to automatically set the (Edge) trigger level, timebase, and vertical settings for display of the
input signal. Press it again to confirm the action.

3. Press to select CHANNEL 1 and display the basic Waverunner-2 menus.


4. Use these menus in the steps on the following pages to adjust the signal’s trace
on the screen.

Turns Channel 1 on or off. T I P: Press twice to turn the


channel on or off.

Accesses the CHANNEL Coupling menus. See page 38.

Automatically makes a zoomed trace of the signal. Use the vertical


POSITION knob to move the trace so that it is clearly visible. Use the
vertical ZOOM knob to adjust its expansion vertically. See page 36.

Automatically sets gain and offset, and “find” the signal.

Selects fixed or variable gain. Select “variable” to control the channel’s


gain continuously. See page 34.
T I P: With AUTO SE TUP you can automatically set
up signals in the 5 mV to 40 V range with a
frequency of ≥50 Hz and a duty cycle
as small as 0.1%.

Selects the grid style and number. Next page: Single


grid. See also Chapter 3, “D isplay Your Signal.”

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 31


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

T O F I N D Y O U R WA Y A R O U N D T H E WA V E R U N N E R - 2 D I S P L A Y

R eal- time C lock field: powered by a battery-backed real-time clock , it


displays the current date and time.

D isplayed T race L abel indicates each channel or channel displayed, the


time/ div and volts/ div settings, and cursor readings where appropriate.

Acquisition Summary field: timebase, volts/ div, probe


attenuation, and coupling for each channel, with the selected
channel highlighted.

32 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R O N E : Catch a N ew Wave

T rigg er L evel arrows on both sides of the grid that mark


the trigger voltage level relative to ground level.

T rigg er D elay is an arrow indicating the trigger time relative to the trace.

T rigg er Status field shows sample rate and trigger re-arming status
(A U T O, N OR M A L , S I N G L E , S T OPPE D ). T he small square icon flashes
to indicate that an acquisition has been made.

T rigg er C onfig uration field contains an icon indicating the type of


trigger, and information on the trigger’s source, slope, level and coupling, and
other information when appropriate.

T race and G round L evel shows the trace number and ground level
marker.

Other display areas include the T ime and F requency field , located below the grid and stating
time and frequency relative to cursors, and a M essag e field placed above the grid and reserved for
special messages. F or more about the display, see Chapter 3, “ D isplay Your S ignal.”

USE TIME / DIV TO ADJUST THE TIME BASE N OT E : AUTO SE TUP operates only
on channels that are turned on,
TIME / DIV unless no channels are turned on.
Then all channels will be affected.
s ns When more than one channel is
turned on, the first channel in
numerical order with a signal
5. Turn to adjust the timebase as desired. applied to it will be automatically
set up for edge triggering.

The time per division is set in a 1–2–5 sequence. The Waverunner-2 automatically adapts itself to use the
maximum sampling rate whenever the timebase is changed. The selected time/ div setting is shown in the trace
label at the top left portion of the screen, and the sampling rate in the trigger status field at the bottom right-
hand corner.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 33


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

ADJUST SE N SITIVITY AN D POSITION UTILITY

VOLTS / DIV T I P: Press to select Special Modes.


V mV
Then select the Channels menu to choose
In: to set the offset of a gain
(VOLTS/ DIV) change in volts or vertical
6. Turn to reduce the vertical gain sensitivity.
divisions (this is in volts, by default).
The volts/ div setting is shown in the Channel 1 trace
label. Automatic Recalibration: to turn this
feature on or off (default is “On”). “Off”
The next two steps can be taken (if not already ) when you
may speed capture, but time calibration is
wish to fine tune the vertical gain and get a better vertical
not certain during the capture period.
resolution:
Global BWL: to control the global
7. Fine tune the vertical gain by selecting “variable” from
bandwidth limit. When On, the chosen
the Gain menu (see page 31).
bandwidth (see page 38) applies to all
8. Now turn the VOLTS / DIV knob through several channels. When Off, a bandwidth limit
complete rotations, so that the entire signal reaches can be set individually for each channel.
from top to bottom of the grid. Filling the grid in this
way, you can use the full range of available digitizing
levels.

OFFSET

9. Use to center the waveform on the grid.

ZOOM AN D SCROLL AUTOMATICALLY

Use ZOOM to see more detail on your signal. The display will show the original signal and its zoomed copy.

10. Press to display the TRACE A menus (to display Trace B, C, or D, press its button).

11. Press again or the top soft key to display the trace and its label. (Do the same to turn off a trace.)

T I P: To go back to the default power-up


12. Press the soft key for: settings, simultaneously press the second
and fifth menu soft keys and .
The menus shown on the next page will be displayed.

13. Use these menus to scroll back and forth through the full length of one or all of your zoom copies.

34 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R O N E : Catch a N ew Wave

MULTI-ZOOM unifies the control of all zoom traces, while AUTO-SCROLL


walks the zoom trace or traces across the referenced trace.
When Off, only the active zoom trace is controlled. When On, all
displayed zoom traces (A, B, C, D) are simultaneously controlled
(automatically) with Auto Scroll and (manually) with the horizontal
ZOOM and POSITION knobs. See the next page for more on
Multi-Zoom.

To scroll the zoom trace from right to left of screen. When playing,
the menu is labeled “STOP (PLAYING)”: Press to stop.

To scroll the zoom trace from left to right of screen. When playing,
the menu is labeled “STOP (RE VERSING)”: Press to stop.

To scroll by divisions per second or number of divisions. Use div/ s to


scroll continuously for viewing. Use number of div for waveform
processing, especially Pass/Fail testing. When processing is complete,
the display will be updated by the number of divisions set.
To set scroll speed, using the knob. When scrolling by
divisions, 10 div will step the zoom trace “grid-page” by
“grid-page” across the length of the referenced trace.

To return to the TRACE A menus, while continuing to


scroll, by pressing the menu soft key.

To stop scrolling and return to the previous menu displayed.

T I P: Consider zoom as an extra timebase that offers


alternative sweep speeds. You can display as many
as four zooms at once.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 35


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

USE THE POSITION AN D ZOOM CON TROL S


T I P: The smaller Waverunner-2 knobs
POSITION are rate sensitive: the faster you rotate
them, the greater the change that
results per degree of rotation.
14. Turn to place Trace A vertically on the grid.

When using more than one grid (see Chapter 3), turn POSITION to move traces from one grid to another.
ZOOM

15. Turn to adjust the expansion factor and increase the amount of zoom.

POSITION

16. Turn to move the zoomed region of the trace.

ZOOM

17. Turn to vertically expand, or reduce, the zoom trace.

T O Z OOM AN D M U L T I - Z O OM
You can zoom several traces from a single waveform to obtain precise timing
measurements and improve the time resolution on your displayed waveform. F or
instance, on a waveform composed of two pulses separated by a long delay, you could
mak e T race A a zoom of the first pulse, and T race B a zoom of the second.

M ulti- Z oom allows you to move the zoomed region of the waveform along two or more different
traces, or two or more regions of the same trace, simultaneously. W hen you activate multi-zoom,
the horizontal zoom and position controls apply to all displayed traces — A , B, C, and D —
allowing you to view similar sections of different traces at the same time. T he vertical sensitivity
controls still act individually on the traces.

W hen trace labels have dotted top and bottom edges, lik e the one at right, this
indicates that their traces are multi-zoomed.

36 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R O N E : Catch a N ew Wave

SE T UP THE TIME BASE

SETUP

18. Press in the Horizontal group of control buttons to access the TIMEBASE menus.

19. Use these menus to set up the timebase in single-shot mode. See Chapter 7,
“A Quest ion of T imebase,” for more on the sampling modes.

Single-Shot sampling displays data collected during successive single-shot


acquisitions from the input channels — capture nonrecurring, or very low
repetition-rate events, simultaneously on all input channels.
To select Internal or external — E CL, 0V, TTL — clock modes.
Select internal unless using an external clock signal. See Chapter 7, “A
Quest ion of T imebase,” for external clock. The LT374 and
LT264 series have a “Channel Use” menu below “Sample Clock” (see
“Pairing Channels” in Chapter 8).

To switch sequence mode On or Off. Use the knob to


choose the number of segments. See Chapter 7, “A
Quest ion of T imebase,” for sequence sampling.

To select the maximum number of samples to be


acquired, using the menu knob; and, to set the default
50k, using the menu soft key.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 37


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

SE T THE COUPLIN G

20. Press and then the soft key for to display the coupling menus.

21. Use these menus to set input signal coupling and grounding, the channel
bandwidth limit, and the probe attenuation.
Selects the signal coupling.

Moves your selection down the list. When at the bottom, as here, the
down arrow disappears and this soft key becomes inactive.

Press N ORMAL to set offset, volts/ div, and input coupling to display
ECL signals. Press again; settings for TTL signals are given. Press a
third time; settings will return to those of the last manual setup.
Press to turn the bandwidth limit Off or reduce the bandwidth to
200 MHz or 20 MHz. Reduces signal and system noise and prevents
high-frequency aliasing. Global BWL means that the limit set will
apply to all channels. BWL means that a limit can be set individually
for each channel. See the TIP on page 34 for how to set these, using
SPECIAL MODES.
Sets the probe attenuation factor for the input channel.
The soft keys scroll up or down, while the knobs scroll
the selector up and down the list. LeCroy’s ProBus
system automatically senses probes and sets their
attenuation. This menu then changes to indicate the
type of probe attached and its attenuation factor. See
the following pages for more on probes and ProBus.

N OT E :
AC position: signals are coupled capacitively, the input signal’s DC component is blocked, and
signal frequencies below 10 Hz are limited.
DC position: signal frequency components are allowed to pass through, and an input impedance
of either 1MΩ Ω or 50 Ω can be selected. The maximum dissipation into 50 Ω is 0.5 W. Whenever
this is attained, inputs will automatically be grounded. “Grounded” will be highlighted in the
“Coupling” menu and an overload message will be displayed in the Acquisition Summary field.
Reset by removing the signal from the input and reselecting “DC50Ω Ω.”

38 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R O N E : Catch a N ew Wave

SE T UP FOR CAL AN D BN C SIGN ALS

UTILITY

1. Press .

2. Press the soft key to select and display the CAL BNC OUT menus.

3. Use these menus to choose the type of signal put out at the front CAL and
rear BNC signal outputs. Set the frequency, amplitude, and pulse shape of
the calibration signal.

Sets the type of signal from the rear BNC connector.

Resets the CAL output to its default state: a 1 kHz 1 V square wave.
The Waverunner-2 automatically sets the calibration signal to its default
when switched on.

Selects the form of the calibration signal.

Sets the pulse level for the CAL output (range: −1.00 to
1.00 V), using the knob.

Sets the desired frequency of a CAL signal in the range


500 Hz to 1 MHz, using the knob.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 39


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

T O CAL I B R AT E T H E P ASSI V E PR O B E

Your Waverunner-2 scope comes with a L eC roy passive probe for each channel.

F irst. T urn on your Waverunner-2 scope.


Second. I nsert the probe lead in the C hannel 1 input.
T hird. Connect the probe tip to the C A L out put (see front panel illustration in “ F irst
T hings” ).

F ourth. A ttach the lead’s alligator clip to the ground ring indicated by , located below C A L .

T he C A L signal will be a 1 k H z square wave, 1 V p– p.

UTILITY

F ifth. Press , then the soft k ey to select

Sixth. T urn the k nob for and set the amplitude level.

Seventh. N ow turn the k nob for to set the frequency in the range 500 H z to

1 M H z.
E ighth. S et channel coupling to D C 1 M Ω using “ C oupling” (see previous page).

N inth. Press to turn on C hannel 1.

AUTO
SETUP
T enth. Press twice.

I f overshoot or undershoot of the displayed signal occurs, adjust the probe by inserting the small
screwdriver, supplied with the probe pack age, into the potentiometer on the probe head and turning it
clock wise or counterclock wise to achieve the optimal square wave contour.

40 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R O N E : Catch a N ew Wave

H O W P R O B U S H E L P S YO U

L eC roy’s ProBus probe system provides a complete measurement solution from probe
tip to oscilloscope display.

ProBus allows you to control transparent gain and offset directly from your front panel —
particularly useful for voltage, differential, and current active probes. I t uploads gain and offset
correction factors from the ProBus E PR OM S , and automatically compensates to achieve fully
calibrated measurements.

T his intelligent interconnection between your Waverunner-2 scope and a wide range of accessories
offers important advantages over standard BN C and probe ring connections. ProBus ensures correct
input coupling by auto-sensing the probe type, eliminating the guesswork and errors that occur when
attenuation or amplification factors are set manually.

T I P: Use the Waverunner-2’s rear panel BN C signal output to provide a


pulse:
For Pass/ Fail testing
At the occurrence of each accepted trigger event (Trigger Out)
When the scope is ready to accept a trigger event (Trigger Rdy)

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 41


C H APT E R T WO : Simply Trigger
In this chapter, see how
To control triggers
To set up an E dge trigger
To re-arm triggering
To determine level, coupling and slope
To use Window trigger
To obtain a summary of your trigger and system status

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

42
C H APT E R T WO Simply Trigger

Edge TriggeronSimple Signals


The Waverunner-2 uses many waveform capture techniques that trigger on features and conditions, which you
define. These triggers fall into two major categories:
E dge — activated by basic waveform features or conditions such as a positive or negative slope, and
holdoff
SMART Trigger  — sophisticated triggers that enable you to use basic and complex conditions for
triggering. See Chapter 8, “Trigger Smar t .”
Use the Edge trigger type for simple signals, and the SMART Trigger type for signals with rarer features such
as glitches.

CON TROL TRIGGE RIN G

DELAY

Horizontal: Turn to adjust the trigger’s horizontal position.

You can adjust the trigger’s position from 0% to 100% pre-trigger, from left to right on the grid. DELAY can
also be used for setting the post-trigger, in time units, up to 10 000 divisions, in increments of 0.1 division.
The trigger location is shown by the arrow at the grid bottom, as
shown here at near right.
Post-trigger delay is labeled in the trigger delay field, where the
arrow becomes horizontal, as shown here at far right.

LEVEL

Vertical: Turn to adjust the trigger’s vertical threshold.


Turn this knob to adjust the level of the trigger source or the highlighted trace. Level defines the source voltage
at which the trigger will generate an event — a change in the input signal that satisfies the trigger conditions.

Arrows on both sides of the grid show the threshold position. But these arrows are only
visible if the trigger source is displayed and the source signal DC coupled.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 43


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

SE T UP AN E DGE TRIGGE R
SETUP

1. Press TRIGGER to access these menus:


Use them to select the trigger source, the source’s coupling, the slope (positive
or negative) and the amount of trigger holdoff by time or events.

1. Select “Edge” or “SMART”: “E dge” is selected by default.

T I P: Once set, trigger level and coupling pass unchanged from


trigger type to trigger type for each trigger source.

2. Select the trigger source. This could be a signal on a channel, the


line voltage that powers the Waverunner-2, or the EXT BNC
connector.

3. Select the coupling for the trigger source.

4. Place the trigger point on the positive or negative slope of the


selected source, or choose to define a window.

When Window is selected from the above menu, a


menu appears here that allows you to define the
window’s size. See page 47.

Enable holdoff to delay triggering for a defined time, or


number of events, after a particular trigger event. Use
this soft key to select Time or E vents, and the knob to
set the value. Off deactivates the holdoff. See Chapter 8,
“Trigger Smar t .”
DELAY

5. Turn to adjust the trigger’s horizontal position, and the amount of pre-trigger, as desired.

LEVEL

6. Turn to adjust the trigger voltage level.

44 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WO : Simply Trigger

T O D E T E R M I N E T R I GGE R L E V E L , C O U PL I N G AN D SL O PE

L evel defines the source voltage at which the trigger circuit will generate an event:
a change in the input signal that satisfies the trigger conditions. T he selected trigger
level is associated with the chosen trigger source.
T rigger level is specified in volts and normally remains unchanged when you change the vertical gain
or offset. T he amplitude and range of the trigger level are limited as follows:
± 5 screen divisions with a channel as the trigger source
± 0.5 V with E X T as the trigger source
± 5 V with E X T / 10 as the trigger source
N one with L I N E as the trigger source (zero crossing is used).

C oupling refers to the type of signal coupling at the input of the trigger circuit. A s with the
trigger level, you can select the coupling independently for each source. Change the trigger source and
you can change the coupling. You can choose from these coupling types:

D C: A ll the signal' s frequency components are coupled to the trigger circuit for high frequency
bursts or where the use of A C coupling would shift the effective trigger level.
A C : T he signal is capacitively coupled, D C
levels are rejected and frequencies below 50 H z
attenuated.
L F R E J : T he signal is coupled through a

e
Slop
capacitive high-pass filter network , D C is rejected
and signal frequencies below 50 k H z are attenuated.

itive
For stable triggering on medium to high frequency Trigger level
signals.

Pos
H F R E J : S ignals are D C coupled to the trigger
circuit, and a low-pass filter network attenuates
frequencies above 50 k H z; used for triggering on low
frequencies.
H F : U se only when needed for triggering on
high-frequency repetitive signals. H F is
automatically overridden and set to A C when
incompatible with trigger characteristics such as those
of S M A R T T rigger.
Trigger
Slope determines the direction of the trigger voltage
transition used for generating a particular trigger F igure 1. E dge trigger work s on the selected
event. You can choose a positive or negative slope. edge at the chosen level. T he slope — positive
L ik e coupling, the selected slope is associated with here — is highlighted on the trigger icon.
the chosen trigger source.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 45


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

T O R E - AR M A T R I GGE R
T hree trigger re-arming modes — A U T O, N OR M A L , and S I N G L E — are
available for all types of triggers. I n addition, S T OP cancels the capture in all
three modes.

AUTO

Press to activate A U T O mode: the trace will automatically be displayed if no trigger occurs
soon after. But if a signal does occur, the Waverunner-2 behaves as if in N OR M A L mode.
NORMAL

Press to enter N OR M A L mode and continuously update the display while there is a valid
trigger. I f there is no valid trigger, the last signal is retained and the warning “ S L OW
T R I G G E R ” is displayed in the trigger status field.
SINGLE

Press to enter S I N G L E mode: the Waverunner-2 will wait for a single trigger to occur, then
display the signal and stop capturing. I f no trigger occurs, you can press this button again to
manually trigger the scope.
STOP

Press to halt the capture made in A U T O, N OR M A L or S I N G L E re-arming modes. Press


S T OP to prevent capture of a new signal, or while a single-shot capture is under way to k eep the
last captured signal.

T O R E COGN IZ E T RIGGE R ICON S


T rigger icons allow immediate on-screen recognition of the current trigger conditions. T here is an
icon for each trigger. T he more heavily mark ed transitions on the icon indicate the slope on which the
trigger will be generated. T he icons are annotated with information on the trigger settings.
T his icon, for example, represents an E dge trigger set up to trigger on the positive slope, at a level of
0.008 V , with a holdoff time of 50 ns.

46 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WO : Simply Trigger

USE WIN DOW TRIGGE R


Define a region whose boundaries extend above and below the selected trigger level. A trigger event will occur
when the signal leaves this window region in either direction and passes into the upper or lower region (Fig. 2).
The next trigger will occur when the signal again passes into the window region.

1. Select .

2. Then turn the knob for to define the size of the window region (0.80 to 9.99 V).

As you turn the knob, a solid bar that shrinks or lengthens at the left-hand side of the grid visually indicates the
window’s height.

Upper Region

WIN DOW REGION


Trigger Level

Lower Region

Time

Triggers

F igure 2. W indow T rigger: triggers when the signal leaves the window region. T he arrows indicate
where triggers occur when the signal leaves the window region.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 47


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

TRIGGE R SOURCE
The trigger source may be one of the following:
The acquisition channel signal (CH 1, CH 2, CH 3 or CH 4) conditioned for the overall voltage gain,
coupling, and bandwidth.
The line voltage that powers the oscilloscope (LINE ). This can be used to provide a stable display of
signals synchronous with the power line. Coupling and level are not relevant for this selection.
The signal applied to the E XT BNC connector (EXT). This can be used to trigger the oscilloscope within
a range of ±0.5 V on EXT and ±5 V with EXT/ 10 as the trigger source.

Level
Level defines the source voltage at which the trigger circuit will generate an event (a change in the input signal
that satisfies the trigger conditions). The selected trigger level is associated with the chosen trigger source. Note
that the trigger level is specified in volts and normally remains unchanged when the vertical gain or offset is
modified.
The Amplitude and Range of the trigger level are limited as follows:
±5 screen divisions with a channel as the trigger source
±5 V with EXT/ 10
none with LINE as the trigger source (zero crossing is used)

Note: Once specified, Trigger Level and Coupling are the only
parameters that pass unchanged from trigger mode to trigger mode
for each trigger source.

48 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WO : Simply Trigger

OBTAIN A TRIGGE R STATUS SUMMARY


Display a summary of the status of your trigger, as well as timebase, vertical sensitivity, probe attenuation, and
offset and coupling for each channel.
SCOPE PRINT
STATUS SCREEN

1. Press to show the STATUS menus. T I P: Press to document your status summary
and make a hard copy.
2. Select Acquisition. PANELS

Press when you have a setting you want to


reuse (see the next chapter for more on this).

Press the S COPE S T A T U S button for access to full-screen summaries of your Waverunner-2’s
system status and other functional status.
See Chapter 8, “Trigger Smart,” for more about E dge trigger and all about the SMART Trigger types.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 49


C H APT E R T H R E E : Display Your Signal
In this chapter, see how
To view signal changes over time
To set up the display

To set up for Analog Persistence
To choose a grid style
To save and recall panel setups

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

50
C H APT E R T H R E E Display YourSignal

Display Persistence
You can use Waverunner-2 colors and tools to display your T I P: To clear your settings and make a
signal on the screen. “fresh” start on a new waveform:
View one, two, four, or eight grids and up to eight traces 1. Connect the signal to be measured to a
(depending on model) at the same time. Adjust display and Waverunner-2 channel.
grid intensity. Choose from several grid styles. Or fill the 2. Simultaneously press the second and
entire screen with your waveforms using Full Screen.
fifth menu soft keys and to revert
You can personalize your Waverunner-2 display, while to the default settings.
managing color and screen intensity automatically. The
displayed signal and all related information share identifying 3. Turn off any unwanted traces by
colors chosen by you. Show signals and traces opaquely or pressing A, B, C, or D.
transparently, so that overlapping objects — traces over 4. Press SE LE CT 1, 2, 3, or 4 for the
traces, traces over grids — are always visible. signal’s channel and choose
“Coupling.” E nsure that the coupling
Other invaluable tools and techniques, such as the matches the circuit’s impedance. If not,
Analog Persistence feature, help you display your waveform set it correctly using the menu soft key.
and reveal its idiosyncrasies.
5. Press AUTO SE TUP twice.
Then follow the steps below.

VIE W SIGN AL CHAN GE S OVE R TIME


Use Persistence to accumulate on-screen points from many acquisitions and see your signal change over time.
The Waverunner-2 persistence modes show the most frequent signal path “three-dimensionally” in intensities
of the same color, or graded in a spectrum of colors.

To display your waveform with persistence:

ANALOG
PERSIST

1. Press to display your signal with


Analog Persistence or Color Graded persistence.

DISPLAY

2. Press to display the “Display Setup” menus.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 51


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

SE T UP YOUR DISPLAY

3. Use these menus to set up your display. When not using persistence, some menus
are different, as indicated below.

Selects standard or XY display: Standard is selected by default.


See Chapter 9, “D isplay M ore,” for XY display.
ANALOG
PERSIST

Turns persistence on or off. Or press to toggle it on or off.


Infinite is the default “persist for” setting under Persistence Setup.

Sets up the persistence display (see next page). When Persistence is Off,
this menu becomes Dot Join: when there are more than 400 sample
points on the screen, the points are connected by line segments.

Accesses more display setup menus. See Chapter 9, “D isplay M ore.”

Selects the grid style and number. See page 58.

Used with persistence to select the displayed trace for the


menu action below. When persistence is not being used, this
menu is called W’form + Text and its knob adjusts
waveform and text brightness.
Used with persistence to select the percentage of
saturation: 100% spreads the spectrum across the entire
depth of the persistence data map; at lower values, the
spectrum will saturate — brightest color or shade — at the
percentage value specified. Lowering this percentage causes
the pixels to be saturated at a lower data intensity, and
T I P: At 0% intensity in Standard display makes visible rarely hit pixels not seen at higher
without persistence, the waveform and text percentages.
disappear.
When persistence is not being used, this menu is called
PANELS
Grid intensity; its knob adjusts the intensity of the grid.
Press to recall a panel setup and to Grids can be brightened, or blended with displayed traces
return them to normal brightness. by reducing their intensity. Also press this menu soft key to
return brightness from 0% to the default level.

52 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H R E E : Display YourSignal

SE T UP FOR PE RSISTE N CE

4. Press the menu soft key for to access these menus.

5. Use them to set up your persistence display.

Displays the last trace captured.

Selects the persistence duration, in seconds. If this were to be set at


1 s, for example, each captured trace would be displayed for one
second and then deleted. The number of sweeps included in the
display (up to one million) is indicated at the bottom of each trace
label. The default selection is Infinite.

Selects persistence for all, or the top two labeled traces displayed. This
becomes useful when four traces or functions are shown and
persistence will not be applied to all of them.

Selects Analog and renders the persistence data maps to the screen in
intensities of the trace color; or selects Color Graded, where the
maps are rendered in a red-to-violet spectrum.

Selects the displayed trace for the menu action below.

Selects the percentage of saturation. See menu


explanation on the previous page.

6. Press Return to go back to the main display setup menus.

CLEAR
SWEEPS

T I P: Press to restart the persistence accumulation of


points — for example, when you change the signal source and
want to clear the previous trace.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 53


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

SE T UP FOR PE RSISTE N CE AN D HISTORY USIN G AN AL OG PE RSIST BUTTON


ANALOG
PERSIST

7. Press .

8. Use them to set up your persistence display.

Enables Persistence. The displayed time interval is the “Persist for”


setting from Persistence Setup.
Displays the PERSISTE NCE SE TUP menus described on the
preceding page. The number of sweeps included in the display (up to
one million) is indicated at the bottom of each trace label. The default
selection is Infinite.
Displays History menus (see next page).

54 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H R E E : Display YourSignal

WH E N U S I N G T H E A N A L O G P E R S I S T B U T T O N T O E N T E R H I S T O R Y
T he default number of segments and the record length are determined by the
“ S equence” and “ R ecord up to” settings in the T imebase menu. You can change
these settings at any time, although doing so will clear sweeps and begin a new
collection of data. I n H istory mode, each sweep will be composed of a number of
segments, each with a defined record length.

T o initiate H istory data collection, properly trigger the scope; the signal will be
collected. Persistence will be automatically turned on before data collection, with the
“ Persist for” setting defaulted to whatever was previously set.

NORMAL SINGLE

T o collect more than one sweep, trigger in mode or press for the
required number of sweeps. S ingle shot triggering is best because there is no way to
view a segment in a sweep earlier than the current sweep unless that sweep was
saved to memory.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 55


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

SE T UP FOR HISTORY

9. From the PERSIST menu, select .

10. Use these menus to set up your History display.

Turns History off and returns to preceding menu.

Searches through a set of segments one by one or plays through them


in forward or reverse order, with a pause for each display.
Selects the type of segment data to be displayed below the grid.
Timestamp displays acquisition time for each segment, time since the
first segment in that sweep, and time between segments. Voltage
displays five voltage parameters plus statistics. Time displays similar
information for time parameters.

Selects the trace for display, defined by the selections below.

Selects the number of events when Time or Voltage is


selected for “Show” above. When Timestamp is
selected, you can scroll through the segments one at a
time by pressing the soft key, or play through them in
forward or reverse order by turning the knob.
Used with persistence to select the percentage of
saturation: 100% spreads the spectrum across the entire
depth of the persistence data map; at lower values, the
spectrum will saturate (brightest color or shade)at the
percentage value specified. Lowering this percentage
causes the pixels to be saturated at a lower data intensity,
and makes visible rarely hit pixels not seen at higher
percentages.

56 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H R E E : Display YourSignal

11. To view a particular segment, from the HISTORY menu select . The segment
selected is displayed on channel D.

12. Use these menus to locate the segment for display.

Automatically displays each segment sequentially forward, beginning


with the selected segment. Press a second time to stop forward play.

Automatically displays each segment sequentially backward, beginning


with the selected segment. Press a second time to stop backward play.

Press the button to advance forward one segment at a


time, or turn the knob forward or backward to rapidly
locate a segment.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 57


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

CHOOSE A GRID STYLE


At left are the Standard grid styles for one, two, and four
grids. Depending on the Waverunner-2 model, six or eight
traces on six or eight grids can be shown at once (see
facing page), with their trace labels and any combination
of math, zoom, and memories. Standard grids present
source waveforms versus time (for FFT, versus frequency).
XY display, on the other hand, compares one source
waveform with another. It has its own special grids (see
Chapter 9, “ D isplay M ore” ). The Parameter-style grid
is displayed automatically when parameters are used (see
next chapter).

T O L I N K A N D S E PA R A T E O B JE C T S
WI T H C O L O R

Advanced color manag ement ensures that


objects — grids, waveforms, cursors, or text — are
always visible, even when overlapping. S ignals and
their related data are color associated. E ach trace
has its own dedicated color. Persistence displays are
automatically color matched to the parent trace.
R elated traces and text, icons and parent-daughter
zoom regions are also link ed by color.

The choice of background color is limited to the


darker colors so that displayed objects will be clearly
defined and recognizable. T he colors of objects that
are too close in hue to the chosen back ground color
are automatically changed so that the objects always
stand out.
E ach trace has its own color. But expanded or
zoomed sections of a trace can be given their own
colors, so that a single trace may have a number of
colors at once: its principal color plus those of a
number of expanded regions.
Trace-related text includes pieces of on-screen
information that describe measurement parameters,
cursors, triggers, waveforms, and channels. A
standard text color covering all on-screen text exists
in the preset color schemes, or can be chosen for
custom palettes. S ee Chapter 9, “ D isplay M ore.”

58 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H R E E : Display YourSignal

Waveform source descriptions, trace labels and the information they contain will always tak e the
color of their respective traces, as in this four-channel model’s Octal-grid, eight-trace display.
Most menus are displayed in the text color only. T he active trigger edge or condition shows source
related information in the trace color, as does the trigger icon. Channel C oupling menu titles are
trace colored, and M ath S et-U p menu sources have their own color.
S elect O paque to place overlapping waveforms one on top of the other in normal, non-transparent
layers. S elect T ransparent for overlap mixing: those areas of the waveforms that overlap will
automatically change color, while grid intensity remains constant. S ee Chapter 9, “ D isplay M ore.”
Objects are automatically overlaid in sequence. W ith traces of the same type, the foremost is
described in the top trace label, the next in the second-from-top trace label, and so on in descending
order toward the back ground. Choose the order in which traces appear using the S E L E C T soft keys.
W hen different types of traces are displayed, placed by default in ascending order from the grid at
the bottom are: envelope traces, persistence traces, normal traces, and cursors (foremost on the
screen). T his sequence can also be customized.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 59


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

Save and Recall YourPanel Setups


Your Waverunner-2 scope allows you to store your preferred display settings and recall them later. Or choose to
recall a default setup already installed in the scope. Storing and recalling panel setups is very practical when you
have set up elaborate zoom and math displays on multiple traces and would like to use them on another signal.
The scope can store four panel setups in volatile memory, and many more to floppy disk or the optional PC
Card slot (memory card or hard disk card), in numbered files marked with their date and time of storage. You
can recall them quickly and easily for later use.

SAVE PAN E L SE TUPS

PANELS

1. Press to display the PANEL SETUPS menus.

Use these menus to save your preferred panel setups — to SETUP1 in this
example.

2. Select Save.

3. Saves to SE TUP1.

Saves to SE TUP2.

Saves to SE TUP3.

Saves to SE TUP4.

Saves to PC Card slot.

Saves to floppy disk.

60 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H R E E : Display YourSignal

RE CALL PAN E L SE TUPS

1. Press the soft key to select .

2. Press the soft key to select and recall the setup you stored for example in SETUP 3.

Or, to recall a default setup already stored in your scope, press the soft key to select

Or, when you store setups to floppy disk or PC Card, press the soft key to select

The last alternative accesses the RECALL SE TUPS menu, which enables you to recall setups from a
floppy disk in the floppy disk drive, or an optional portable storage device (PC memory card or hard disk
card) in the PC Card slot.

To store and recall the waveforms themselves, see Chapter 5, “U se M ath Tools.”

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 61


C H APT E R F O U R : Choose a Measure Tool
In this chapter, see how
To control time cursors
To control amplitude cursors
To use cursors in standard display
To select a standard parameter

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

62
C H APT E R F O U R Choose a Measure Tool

Cursors: Tools forMeasuring Signal Values


In Standard display mode, Amplitude (or Voltage) cursors, which appear as broken lines or bars
running across the screen, are moved up and down the grid pixel by pixel.
Time cursors (arrows or cross-hair markers that move along the waveform) can be placed at a
desired time to read the amplitude of a signal at that time, and moved to every single point acquired.
When a Time cursor is placed on a data point, a cross-bar appears at the tail of the arrow, or at top and bottom
of the cross-hair marker.
In Absolute mode, a single cursor is controlled. Readings for amplitude (using Amplitude cursors) or time and
amplitude (using Time cursors) can be displayed at the cursor location. Measured voltage amplitudes are
relative to ground; measured times are relative to the trigger point.
In Relative mode, two Amplitude or two Time cursors are controlled at the same
time, providing readings on the difference between the two in amplitude, or time
and amplitude, respectively.

Amplitudes are shown in the trace label for each trace. When Time cursors are used, the time is shown below
the grid. In Relative mode, the frequency corresponding to the time interval between the cursors is also
displayed there.
When there are few data points displayed, Time cursor positions are linearly interpolated between the data
points. Time cursors move up and down along these straight line segments.

CURSORS AN D PE RSISTE N CE
When using Persistence, Amplitude cursors are the same as in Standard Display (see above). Time cursors are
vertical bars that move horizontally across the screen.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 63


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

CURSORS IN XY DISPLAY
In XY Display, Absolute Amplitude cursors are horizontal and vertical bars that you can move up and down
and from side to side across the screen. Relative Amplitude cursors are pairs of bars that move in the same way.
Absolute and Relative Time cursors behave as they do in Standard Display
Combinations of the Amplitude values are shown on the left-hand side of the grid in the following top-to-
bottom order.
1. “∆Y value / ∆X value”.....................Ratio
2. “20 ∗ log 10 (ratio)” ..........................Ratio in dB units
3. “∆Y value ∗ ∆X value”.....................Product
4. “φ = arc tan (∆Y / ∆X)
range [–180° to + 180°]”...........................Angle (polar)
5. “r = sqrt (∆X ∗ ∆X + ∆Y ∗ ∆Y)”..Radius (distance to origin).
The definition of ∆X and ∆Y depends on the cursor used. The table below shows how ∆X and ∆Y are defined
for each type of measurement.

Cursors
T Abs
AAbs ARel Org = (0,0) Org = VXOffset T Rel
VYOffset

∆X VXRef – 0 VXDif – VXRef VXRef – 0 VXRef – VXOffset VXDif – VXRef


∆Y VYRef – 0 VYDif – VYRef VYRef – 0 VYRef – VYOffset VYDif – VYRef
WHE RE :
A Abs A bsolute A mplitude cursors V XRef V oltageof theReferencecursorontheX trace
A Rel Relative A mplitude cursors V YRef V oltageof theReferencecursorontheY trace
T Abs A bsolute Time cursors V XDif V oltageof theDifferencecursorontheX trace
T Rel Relative Time cursors V YDif V oltageof theDifferencecursorontheY trace
Org Origin

64 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U R : Choose a Measure Tool

WAVE PILOT

1. Press ; the following menu is displayed.


2. Use these menus to set up for parameters.
Turns off cursors (or parameters) and returns the display to grids only.
To reactivate cursors, press the soft key for Cursors, next in line. To
reactivate parameters, press the soft key for Measure.

Accesses cursor setup menus.

Accesses parameter setup menus.

Access Histograms, JitterTrack, FFT, and TrackView features.

Accesses setup menus for pass/ fail testing.

Accesses software options like Power Measure. These


software packages modify normal scope control and menu
layout. This soft key is labeled only if analysis packages are
loaded.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 65


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

3. Press ; the following menu is displayed.


4. Use these menus to set up your cursors.

Selects Amplitude (voltage), or Time or frequency cursors.

Relative displays two cursors, Reference and Difference, and indicates


either the voltage or time and voltage between the two. Absolute displays
a single cursor that indicates either voltage compared to ground, or this
and time compared to trigger point.
Selects the Difference minus Reference cursor, or the Difference plus
Reference cursor. This appears only if XY Display is activated.

Controls the Reference cursor available with Relative


cursors. With Track on, reference and difference cursors are
controlled by this knob and move together; a constant time
or voltage interval is maintained between them. This
tracking interval is represented by a bar (horizontal for
time; vertical for voltage) that appears above or to the left
of the grid.
Controls the position of the Relative cursor. It is available
only when Relative is selected from the ‘type” menu above.

66 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U R : Choose a Measure Tool

Measure withCursors
Cursors are important tools that aid you in measuring signal values. Cursors are markers — lines, cross-hairs, or
arrows — that you can move around the grid or the waveform itself. Use cursors to make fast, accurate
measurements and to eliminate guesswork. There are two basic types:
Time (Frequency) cursors are markers that you move horizontally along the waveform. Place them at a
desired location along the time axis to read the signal’s amplitude at the selected time.
Amplitude (Voltage) cursors are lines that you move vertically on the grid to measure the amplitude of a
signal.

CON TROL THE TIME CURSORS

DISPLAY

1. Press and make sure that Standard is selected in the top menu.

2. Press then select Cursors.

SINGLE

3. Press the soft key to select T I P: Press as a smooth way to stop your
Waverunner-2 scope and allow measurement of
the displayed waveform.

4. Press the soft key to select

5. Turn the knob for to move the Absolute Time cursor .

Watch this cross-hair marker move up and down along your displayed waveform. As it moves, the cursor’s time value
in relation to the trigger point is shown beneath the grid, and its voltage value in the trace label.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 67


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

6. Press the soft key to select T IP: Select “↓&↑” fromthe “show” menu to displayin
the trace label the absolute amplitude, withrespect to
ground level, of the two Relative time cursors.

7. Turn the knobs to move the two Relative time cursors along the waveform.

Beneath the grid the Waverunner-2 shows the relative time and voltage difference between the two cursors.
When you use Relative time cursors, the Reference cursor (upward-pointing arrow) can be changed, and could
be different from the trigger point. You might place it, for example, at the falling edge of the captured signal’s
oscillations. You can move the Difference cursor (downward-pointing arrow) to measure the time difference
anywhere on the waveform. Selection ↓–↑ displays the subtraction of the reference from the difference
amplitudes.

CON TROL THE AMPLITUDE CURSORS


T I P: Turn Track “On” in the Reference Cursor
1. Press the soft key to select menu. The difference between the Reference and
Difference cursors will remain the same when you
turn this menu’s knob, and the two cursor bars will
move in tandem. Turn the Difference cursor menu
knob: only this cursor’s position will change. The
link between the two cursors is indicated by a
2. Press the soft key to select vertical bar at the side of the grid. Press the same
menu soft key to turn Track “Off”.

3. Turn the knob for to move the Absolute Amplitude cursor

Place it at the top of your displayed waveform. The difference in amplitude between the cursor and the ground
level (indicated by the ground level marker at right of grid) is shown in the trace label.

68 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U R : Choose a Measure Tool

4. Press the soft key to select and show two bar cursors: Reference and Difference.

5. Turn the knob for to move the Reference cursor.

Turn tracking on to move both cursors together.

6. Turn the knob for to move the Difference cursor only.

When you use Relative Amplitude cursors, you can make the Reference cursor different from ground level. You
might place it, for example, at the base level of a square wave. You could then position the Difference cursor at
the top of the waveform. The difference between the two would then give you the signal’s amplitude, indicated
in the trace label, as illustrated on the next page.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 69


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

R elative A mplitude cursors mark out the signal’s amplitude. H ere it is 510 mV , as indicated in the
trace label at top-left of screen.

70 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U R : Choose a Measure Tool

T O U S E C U R S O R S I N S T A N D A R D D I S P L AY

You can move Amplitude (V oltage) cursors — brok en lines or bars running across
the screen — up and down the grid pixel by pixel. A mplitudes are shown in the
trace label for each trace.

Place T ime (Frequency) cursors — arrows or cross-hair mark ers that move along the waveform —
at a desired time to read the amplitude of a signal at that time, and move them to every single
point acquired.
W hen you place a time cursor on a data point, cross-bars appear on the arrow and cross-hair
markers .
T he time is shown below the grid. I n R elative mode the frequency corresponding to the time interval
between the cursors is also displayed there. W hen there are few data points displayed, time-cursor
positions are linearly interpolated between the data points. T ime cursors move up and down along
these straight-line segments.

I n Absolute mode, you control a single cursor. You can display the cursor location’s readings for
amplitude (using amplitude cursors) or time and amplitude (using time cursors). M easured voltage
amplitudes are relative to ground; measured times are relative to the trigger point.

I n R elative mode, you control a pair of amplitude or time cursors, and get readings on the
difference between the two in amplitude, or time and amplitude.

WH E N I N P E R S I S T E N C E M O D E

I n persistence mode, amplitude cursors are the same as in S tandard display, while time cursors are
vertical bars running down the screen and moving across it.

T I P: To set time-cursor amplitude units in volts or decibels...


UTILITY

Press to access and select Special Modes. Then select


the Cursors Measure menu to access and use the Read time
cursor amplitudes in menu to select the desired unit.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 71


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

Measure Automatically withParameters


Parameters are measurement tools that determine a wide range of signal properties. Use them to automatically
calculate time and voltage values. There are parameter modes for the amplitude and time domains, custom
parameter groups, and parameters for pass and fail testing. You can make common measurements on one
signal in either the standard voltage (amplitude) or standard time modes. On more than one signal, select
parameters from a Custom category and use them to determine up to five quantities at once. Pass and fail
parameters can be customized, too. You can accumulate and display statistics on each parameter’s sweeps,
average, lowest, highest and standard deviation. See Chapter 11, “A nalyze wit h Paramet ers,” for how to
customize parameters, and for a description of each.

A special display is automatically used with parameters, whose data are listed beneath the grid (see
next page for display setup). S hown here: a F ull-S creen, Quad-grid parameter display. T op of facing
page: the S tandard, S ingle-grid, parameter display.

72 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U R : Choose a Measure Tool

CHOOSE A STAN DARD PARAME TE R

1. Press , then select Measure.

Standard Voltage will be selected by default in the mode menu, shown


below, and a list of five parameters will appear beneath the grid. This list
will change when Standard Time is selected. While Measure is selected,
statistics accumulation (see below) goes on, even if not shown.

2. Use these menus to set up for parameters.

Selects the mode. Standard Voltage measures for a single signal: peak-
to-peak (the amplitude between the maximum and minimum sample
values), mean of all sample values, standard deviation, root mean square
of all sample values, and signal amplitude. Standard Time measures for
a single signal: period, width at 50% of amplitude, rise time at 10–90% of
amplitude, fall time at 90–10% of amplitude, and the delay from the first
trigger to the first 50% amplitude point.

Automatically calculates the displayed parameters’ average, lowest, highest


and standard deviation, and number of sweeps used.

Selects the trace on which the parameters are to be measured. This menu
indicates those traces displayed.

Sets the starting point in screen divisions for parameter


measurements, using the knob. Turn Track On, using the
soft key. Control of the starting and end points is linked
and they can be moved together using the knob.
Sets the end point in screen divisions for parameter
measurements, using the knob. Also indicates the total
number of data points used for the measurements.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 73


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

DISPLAY

3. Press to set up the display (to select parameter grid styles, for example) using DISPLAY SETUP.
See the preceding chapter.

TURN OFF CURSORS AN D PARAME TE RS

1. Press to return to the Wavepilot menus, or press .

2. Press the soft key to .

T I P: To clear parameter “statistics” press


CLEAR
SWEEPS

74 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U R : Choose a Measure Tool

T O R E CO GN I Z E P AR AM E T E R SYM B O L S
T he algorithms that allow the Waverunner-2 to determine pulse-waveform parameters
detect the particular situations where the mathematical formulas can be applied.

S ometimes you should interpret the results with caution. I n these cases the scope alerts you by
displaying a symbol under the grid between the name of the parameter and its value. T hese symbols
act as information or warnings:

T he parameter has been determined for several periods (up to 100), and the average of
those values has been tak en.

T he parameter has been determined over an integral number of periods.

T he parameter has been calculated on a histogram.

I nsufficient data to determine the parameter.

A mplitude histogram is flat within statistical fluctuations; minimum and maximum are
used to assign top and base.

Only an upper limit could be estimated (the actual value of the parameter may be
smaller than the displayed value).

T he signal is partially in overflow.

T he signal is partially in underflow.

T he signal is partially in overflow and in underflow.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 75


C H APT E R F IVE : Use MathTools
In this chapter, see how
To set up for math
To do multiplication
To perform an FFT
To do summed averaging
To store and recall waveforms
To obtain a waveform or memory status report

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

76
C H APT E R F IVE Use Math Tools

Make MathEasy
With Waverunner-2 math tools you can perform mathematical functions on a waveform displayed on any
channel, or recalled from any of the four reference memories M1, M2, M3, or M4. To do computations in
sequence, you can also set up any trace of A, B, C, or D for math.
For example: you could set up Trace A as the difference between Channels 1 and 2, Trace B as the average of
A, and Trace C as the integral of B. You could then display the integral of the averaged difference between
Channels 1 and 2. Any trace and function can be chained to another trace and function. For example, you could
make Trace A an average of Channel 1, Trace B an FFT of A, and Trace C a zoom of B.
Waverunner-2 math tools are available in these standard and optional packages:

Arithmetic Sum (add), Difference (subtract), Product (multiply), Ratio (divide)


Averaging Summed (linear) of up to 4000 sweeps or Continuous Average
ST AN D AR D E xtrema envelope, floor, roof
M AT H FFT Fast Fourier Transform to 50 000 points; Power Spectrum, Phase,
I ncluded with all Magnitude; All FFT Windows
Waverunner-2 Functions Identity, Negation, (Sin x)/ x
oscilloscopes Resample (deskew)
Rescale
E nhanced Resolution (ERES)
E XT E N D E D Functions Absolute Value, Derivative, E xp (base e), E xp (base 10), Identity,
M AT H AN D Integral, Log (base e), Log (base 10), Reciprocal, Square, Square
M E ASU R E M E N T Root
O P T I O N (E M M )
A ll tools in Trending
S tandard M ath Histograms for 200 events
plus:

W A V E A N A L YZ E R Averaging Summed, or linear, Average of up to one million waveforms;


OPT ION Continuous Average
(WAV A) FFT+ Fast Fourier Transform to one million points; FFT Average;
Power Averaging, Power Density, Real, Real + Imaginary
A ll tools in
E xtended M ath
plus: Histograms Histograms, Histogram Parameters (up to 2 billion events)

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 77


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

SE T UP TO DO WAVE FORM MATHE MATICS


After connecting your signal to a Waverunner-2 channel (Channel 1 in this example), do the following:

1. Press to select CHANNEL 1 and display the Waverunner-2’s basic menus.

2. Press the soft key to

3. Press to make Trace A a zoom of Channel 1.

4. Press the soft key for

5. Press the soft key to select and display the SETUP OF A menus, shown next page.

T O S E T U P F O R M A T H A N O T H E R WA Y
MATH
TOOLS

F irst. Press to display the Z OOM + M A T H menus.

N OT E : A waveform
Second. S elect or one of the other traces.
processing title for each
displayed trace will be shown
in its trace label. If the title is
missing, the math function
T hird. Press the soft key to select cannot be done and the
contents of the trace will
remain unchanged.
F ourth. Follow the first three steps in the procedure above.

78 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F IVE : Use MathTools

USE A MATH TOOL


Use these menus to choose and set up any math tool. As an example, select the arithmetic tool Product to
multiply Channel 1 by Channel 2.

Enables math.

6. Press to select Arithmetic.

7. Press to select Product.

8. Press the soft key or turn the knob to select Channel 1


as the source trace. When using Arithmetic, this sets
one of the two operand sources. Using other math
types, this menu may be in a different position and may
set the signal offset, number of sweeps, or compensate
for any DC offset in the signal.
9. Press the soft key or turn the knob to select the trace
by which the source trace Channel 1 will be multiplied.

Now go on to set up your trace as an FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) function (next page).

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 79


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

PE RFORM AN FFT OPE RATION


Continuing from the preceding steps, set up Channel 1 for FFT. Fast Fourier Transform will convert your time
domain waveform into a frequency domain spectrum similar to that of an RF spectrum analyzer display. But
unlike the analyzer, which has controls for span and resolution bandwidth, with the Waverunner-2 you
determine the FFT span using the scope’s sampling rate (see Chapter 10, “U se A dvanced M at h Tools” ).

10. Press the soft key to select FFT from the Math Type menu.
T I P: During FFT computation,
the FFT sign is shown below
the grid. The computation can
Spectra will be shown with a linear frequency axis running from zero to
take a while on long time-
the Nyquist frequency. The frequency scale factors (Hz/ div) are in a
domain records, but you can
1–2–5 sequence. The processing equation is displayed at the bottom of
stop it at any time by pressing
the screen, together with the three key parameters that characterize an
any front panel button.
FFT spectrum:

Transform size N (number of input points)


Nyquist frequency (= ½ sample rate)
Frequency increment, ∆f, between two successive points of the spectrum.
These parameters are related as: Nyquist frequency = ∆f ∗ N/ 2, where ∆f = 1/ T, and T is the duration of
the input waveform record (10 ∗ time/ div). The number of output points is equal to N/ 2.

11. Press the soft key to select Power Spectrum from the menu

Power Spectrum is the signal power, or magnitude, represented on a logarithmic vertical scale: 0 dBm
corresponds to the voltage (0.316 V peak), which is equivalent to 1 mW into 50 Ω. Power Spectrum is
suitable for characterizing spectra that contain isolated peaks (dBm).

Other FFT functions available in this menu depend on the Waverunner-2 math options installed in your
scope (see page 77).

80 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F IVE : Use MathTools

Phase is measured with respect to a cosine whose maximum occurs at the left-hand edge of the screen, at
which point it has 0°. Similarly, a positive-going sine wave starting at the left-hand edge of the screen has a –
90° phase. Phase is displayed in degrees.
Power Density: Signal power normalized to the bandwidth of the equivalent filter associated with the FFT
calculation. Suitable for characterizing broadband noise. Power Density is displayed on a logarithmic vertical
axis calibrated in dBm. It is available only with the WaveAnalyzer option for the Waverunner-2.

Magnitude: The peak signal amplitude is represented on a linear scale, in the same units as the input signal.

Real, Real + Imaginary, Imaginary: Complex result of the FFT processing in the same units as the input
signal. These are only available with the WaveAnalyzer option.

12. Now turn the knob to select Von Hann and press the soft key to select AC.

AC forces the DC component of the input signal to zero before FFT processing, and improves the amplitude
resolution. This is especially useful when your input has a large DC component.
FFT windows define the bandwidth and shape of the FFT filter. (See Chapter 10, “U se A dvanced M at h
Tools,” for the windows’ filter parameters.)
Von Hann (Hanning) windows reduce leakage and improve amplitude accuracy. But they also reduce
frequency resolution.
Rectangular windows should be used when the signal is transient (completely contained in the time-domain
window) or you know it to have a fundamental frequency component that is an integer multiple of the
fundamental frequency of the window. Other signal types will show varying amounts of spectral leakage and
scallop loss when you use a Rectangular window. To correct this, use another window type.
Hamming reduces leakage and improves amplitude accuracy, but also reduces frequency resolution.
Flat Top provides excellent amplitude accuracy with moderate leakage reduction, but also reduces frequency
resolution.
Blackman–Harris windows reduce leakage to a minimum, but reduce frequency resolution.

13. In the final FFT step, press the soft key to select the source trace.

The “before” and “after” of your FFT computation is shown on the next page.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 81


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

F F T Power S pectrum: T he top grid shows the waveform in the time domain, while the bottom one
shows it in the frequency domain, after F F T Power S pectrum has been applied. W ith the cursor
measure tool (positioned here on the left-most peak of the F F T trace) you can read either the time or
frequency of your waveform. T race A ’s label indicates 50 M H z per division in the frequency domain.
T he memory status field beneath the grids gives other F F T information.

T o move the cursor from one waveform to the other, press then k eep turning the

k nob until the cursor reaches the end of the waveform. T he cursor will jump to
the other waveform, and the indication below the grid will display “ T ime” if the cursor is on the top
waveform or “ Freq” if on the F F T waveform.

82 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F IVE : Use MathTools

DO SUMME D AVE RAGIN G

Now make a Summed Average of your waveform — again, going on from the previous steps. Averaging is
normally used to eliminate noise.

14. Press the soft key to select Average from the Math Type menu.

15. Press the soft key to select the type of averaging you want . For Summed averaging,

you specify the number of acquisitions to be averaged. Continuous averaging helps to eliminate the
effects of noise by continuously acquiring new data and adding the new waveforms into the averaging
buffer. The averaged data is updated at regular intervals and presented on screen. You determine the
importance of new data vs. old data by assigning a weighting factor. continuous averaging (the default
selection) allows you to make adjustments to a system under test and to see the results right away.

The Waverunner-2 starts the calculation immediately.

16. Turn the upper knob to set the number of sweeps (up

to 4000)

This is counted in the trace label, as shown here, at right:

If the Continuous Average is selected, the “for” menu becomes “with…weighting”.


Use it to define the weight.

(See Chapter 10, “U se A dvanced M at h Tools,” for the difference between


summed and continuous averaging.)

17. Finally, press the soft key or turn the knob to select the source trace:

The type of result you can expect is illustrated on the next page.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 83


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

S ummed A verage: N oise evident in the signal shown in the top trace has been eliminated from the
averaged waveform on the lower grid. T he calculation was stopped after 206 sweeps. T he number of
points used in the calculation is shown in the information field at the bottom of the screen. T he same
number of points means that all points were used in the calculation.

84 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F IVE : Use MathTools

Save and Recall Waveforms


Save your waveforms to internal reference memory — M1, M2, M3 or
N OT E : For each unit of record
M4 — or to floppy disk or the optional PC Card slot (Memory card or
length per channel, or per zoom
HDD). Recall them later for further analysis. You could zoom them or
and math trace, a point can be
perform more math.
WAVE
stored in the waveform reference
STORAGE memories M1, M2, M3, or M4.
1. Press and then the soft key for

2. Use these menus to store your displayed waveform.

Stores the waveform, which you first select from the menu below, to the
memory or floppy disk (also selected below).

Selects the channel or trace whose waveform you wish to


store.

Selects the internal reference memory, floppy, or optional


storage device the waveform is to be saved to.
See Chapter 12, “U se Waver unner-2 wit h P C ,” for
how to save waveforms in ASCII format.

3. Press to go back to the “W’FORM” menus in order to recall the


waveform you have stored.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 85


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

4. Press the soft key for

5. These menus will be displayed. Use them to recall your waveform.

Recalls the waveform from memory or portable storage device.

Recalls the selected waveform to the selected trace (see menus below).

Selects the memory in which the waveform you wish to


display is stored.

Selects the trace on which the recalled waveform is to be


displayed.

T I P: Transfer waveform data to PC and use the data for calculations with spreadsheet or math
software. To do this, save your waveforms to floppy or an optional storage device in the ASCII format.
The Waverunner-2 can save to floppy in ASCII traces of up to 50000 points. You should remember
that waveforms stored in ASCII cannot be called back into the oscilloscope. See Chapter 12, “Use
Waverunner-2 with PC.”

86 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F IVE : Use MathTools

OBTAIN A WAVE FORM OR ME MORY STATUS RE PORT


Display a summary of the status of your channels, zoom and math functions, waveform memories, and
displayed traces. View the settings on your vertical and horizontal controls. Check on how much memory your
Waverunner-2 scope is using for storage of records. Clear and free up memory.

SCOPE
STATUS

1. Press to show the STATUS menus.

2. Press the soft key to select Waveform, then the soft key for the waveform status summary of choice.

3. Press the soft key to select Memory Used to obtain a similar report on what you have stored and how
much memory is available. Memories occupied by waveforms will be boxed, and empty ones indicated as
such. You can also clear occupied memories by pressing the corresponding menu soft keys.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 87


C H APT E R SI X : Document YourWork
In this chapter, see how
To print your display using the Waverunner-2 internal printer
To print or plot your display with an external printer or plotter
To create TIFF and BMP image files
To store and retrieve floppy-disk, PC Memory-card and hard-disk-card files
To give custom names to your files and create directories
To add or delete file directories
To copy files from one portable storage device to another

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

88
C H APT E R SI X Document YourWork

Make a Hard Copy


Make a hard copy of your displayed traces and screen data using the scope’s optional internal printer. Or print
to an external printer or plotter using the rear GPIB, RS-232-C, or Centronics port. Create TIFF and BMP
image files with the scope and save them to floppy disk, or optional PC memory or hard disk card.
UTILITY

1. Press to display the UTILITIES menus.

2. Then press the soft key for to access these menus.

Use them to make a hard copy of your screen.

3. Press to select
the optional T I P: Connect an external printer or plotter
internal printer, using one of the ports on the rear of your
or another Waverunner-2 scope. Print or plot to an
device to print external device selected from the “output to”
or save to (see menu. A wide range of printers and plotters
next page). can be used.

4. Press to turn the auto-print function on or off: On


will print a hard copy after every acquisition.

5. Press or turn to expand the waveform and show more detail.

6. Press or turn to select the page format.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 89


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

PRINT PRINT
SCREEN SCREEN

7. Press to print a copy of the screen display. T I P: Press while printing to cancel.

PRIN T, PLOT, OR COPY

1. Press the soft key to select a port, the PC Card slot, or floppy-disk drive:

2. Press the soft key to select a printer, plotter, or graphic protocol (TIFF, BMP, or

HPGL):

Other menus will appear according to your selection. The “plot size” and “pen number” menus appear when a
plotter is selected. The “background” menu becomes available when a color or compressed TIFF or BMP
graphic protocol is used. This gives you the choice between a black or white background for a screen image.
The Waverunner-2 assigns file names automatically when copying to floppy or optional storage device (see
page 91).

3. Press the soft key for to start a new page each time you perform Step 4.
PRINT
SCREEN

4. Press to print, plot, or save a copy of the screen display to a printer, plotter, or graphic protocol.

AUTO
SETUP
TRIGGER

2 2
ZERO DELAY SETUP STOP AUTO NORMAL SINGLE

DELAY LEVEL OFFSET CHANNEL


SELECT

TIME / DIV VOLTS / DIV


s

PANELS
ns

SETUP
TIMEBASE
V

ZOOM + MATH
mV

3 3
POSITION POSITION

5 7
UTILITIES

RESET

DISPLAY ZOOM ZOOM

MATH
STANDBY TOO LS

RETURN

8
MEASURE WAVE SCOPE CLEAR PRINT ANALOG
STATUS

20
TOOLS STORAGE SWEEPS SCREEN PERSIST

CAL

ALL INPUTS
50 Ω 5Vrms
1MΩ 16pF 400Vpk
CAT II

R S -232-C printer cabling: C onnect your scope to a variety of external printers using the rear
R S -232-C port. You could also connect to PC via G PI B, and use the computer to control a printer
connected via R S -232-C . S ee Chapter 12, “ U se Waverunner-2 with PC ,” for computer cabling.

90 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI X : Document YourWork

Manage Floppy orCard Files


Use Waverunner-2 mass-storage utilities to create waveform files on floppy-disk, or optional PC memory card
or hard disk card. Give your files custom names, and create directories for them. Copy files from one portable
storage device to another...

UTILITY

1. Press to display the UTILITIES menus.

2. Press the soft key for and then the soft key for

Or, if saving to an optional device, such as memory card, in the PC Card slot:

3. Follow the on-screen instructions; when saving to floppy disk, press the soft keyto

4. From the menus shown for floppy disk or PC Card slot, press the soft key for

5. Use the menus displayed to format the storage medium in DOS and, in the case of the floppy disk, to
select density. Or copy a machine template (an ASCII file containing binary description information) to the
storage device.

6. Press twice to go back to the MASS STORAGE menus.

7. Press the soft key for to display the PREFERENCES menus.

These menus allow you to select the working directory, to delete directories, and access the File Name
Preferences and Add New Directory menus, described on the following pages.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 91


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

8. Press the soft key to select a directory for file storage and retrieval from the work with menu. Or, the
selected directory can be deleted using the DELETE THIS DIRECTORY menu.

9. Next, press the soft key for to access these menus.

CUSTOMIZE FILE N AME S


The Waverunner-2 gives default names to your files. But you can also customize them using these menus.

10. Give a custom name to your waveform, setup, or hardcopy file.

Selects the character to be modified using the character menu (below).

Restores the file type selected in the File Type menu (see below) to its
default name.

Validates a newly defined name.

Moves the cursor back a space and erases the previous character in the
file name.

Moves the cursor forward and creates a space for the insertion of a
character.

Selects characters — numbers or letters — for creating the


file name, using the knob.

To select the channel of the file type to be customized.

11. Press to go back to PREFERENCES menus.

92 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI X : Document YourWork

ADD A N E W DIRE CTORY

12. Press the soft key for

13. Then use these menus to create a new directory for your custom-named files.

Selects the character to be modified using the character menu (below).

Validates the new directory.

Moves the cursor back a space and erase the previous character in the
file name.

Moves the cursor forward and create a space for the insertion of a
character.

Selects characters — numbers or letters — for creating the


file name, using the knob.

14. Press twice to go back to the MASS STORAGE menus.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 93


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

COPY FILE S
You can copy files from one portable storage device to another: from a floppy disk in the Waverunner-2 floppy
disk drive, to a memory card or hard disk card in the scope’s PC Card slot (or vice versa).

15. Press the soft key for

16. Press the soft key to select the devices you wish to transfer from and to:

17. Press the soft key to transfer certain types of file or all files on the storage device:

18. Press the soft keyto

94 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI X : Document YourWork

H O W W AV E R U N N E R - 2 M A N A G E S M A S S S T O R A G E
W hen you select M ass S torage U tilities from U T I L I T I E S , the M A S S S T OR A G E
menu group gives you access to the mass-storage file system controls. T he system
supports storage and retrieval of data files to and from floppy disk in either the D OS
1.44 M B or 720 k B format.
T he Waverunner-2 writes and reads all files to and from the floppy disk using the current work ing
directory. I f the new file being stored bears the same name as an existing file on the same storage
medium, the old file will be deleted. T he default name of the work ing directory is
L E C R OY _ 1.D I R . T his directory is automatically created when the media is formatted. I f the
media is formatted elsewhere — for instance on a PC — the directory will be created the first time
a file is saved to the floppy disk . T he maximum number of files allowed in any one directory is
2400.
You can change the name of the work ing directory to any valid D OS directory name, using the file-
name preferences menu. A ll work ing directories are created as sub-directories from the root
directory. A s in M S -D OS , the file name can contain up to eight characters followed by an extension
of three characters.
A file is treated as: a panel setup if its extension is PN L ; a waveform if its extension is a three-
digit number; a waveform template if its extension is T PL ; a hard copy if its extension is T I F,
BM P, or PR T ; and H PG L if its extension is PL T . T he table below shows how files are named.

F I L E O R D I R E C T O R Y T YP E DE F AU L T N AM E CU ST O M I Z E D N AM E

M anually stored waveforms Stt.nnn xxxxxxxx.nnn

A utomatically stored waveforms Att.nnn xxxxxxxx.nnn

Panel files Pnnn.PNL xxxxxnnn.PNL


Dnnn.TIF xxxxxnnn.TIF
Dnnn.BMP xxxxxnnn.BMP
H ardcopy files
Dnnn.PRT xxxxxnnn.PRT
Dnnn.PLT xxxxxnnn.PLT
Template files LECROYvv.TPL Cannot be changed
D irectory name LECROY_1.DIR xxxxxxxx
S preadsheet Sttnnn.TXT xxxxxnnn.TXT
MA TL A B Sttnnn.DAT xxxxxnnn.DAT
M athCad Sttnnn.PRN xxxxxnnn.PRN

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 95


P ART O N E : GE T T IN G START E D

KE Y T O M A S S - S T O R A G E T E R M S
w T he template version number: for
x A ny legal D OS file-name character example, for a version 2.2, the template
will be saved as L E C R OY 22.T PL
tt T he trace name of C1, C2, C 3, C 4, TIF
Tagged I mage Format, bitmap image files
T A , T B, T C , T D BMP
nnn A three-digit decimal sequence number
starting at 001 that is automatically PRT H ard copy printer files
assigned
PLT H PG L plotter or vector files

T he default notation for waveform files is S tt.nnn for manually stored files, and A tt.nnn for
automatically stored files. T he characters S and A represent the two storage methods. W hen
automatically generating a file name, the Waverunner-2’s system uses the assigned name plus a three-
digit sequence number. I f the assigned waveform name is already in the default ‘S tt’ form (such as
S C1, S T B) the name will be changed to the ‘A tt’ form: A C 1, A T B and so on. A ll other user-
assigned names remain as entered.
I f you select F ill and use default names, the first waveform stored will be A xx.001, the second
A xx.002, and so on. T he Waverunner-2 continues storing until the storage medium is filled, the file
number reaches 999, or there are more than 2400 files in the current work ing directory.
I f you select Wrap, the oldest auto-stored waveform files will be deleted whenever the medium
becomes full. T he remaining auto-stored waveform files will be renamed — the oldest group of files
will be named “A xx.001” , the second oldest “A xx.002” , and so on.
T he current sequence number is deduced from the Waverunner-2’s inspection of all file names in the
work ing directory, regardless of file type — panel, hard copy, or waveform. T he oscilloscope
determines the highest occupied numeric file-name extension of the form ‘nnn’, and uses the next
highest number as the current generation number for storage operations. W hen you delete a file
generation, the Waverunner-2 deletes all files designated with the three-digit sequence number of the
file-name extension, regardless of file type.
T he mass-storage file system indicates media size and storage availability in k bytes where 1 k byte =
1024 bytes. M any media manufacturers specify the available storage in M bytes where 1 M byte = 1
million bytes. T his results in an apparent mismatch in specified versus actual media storage
availability, when in fact the availability in bytes is identical.
I f the floppy’s write-protection switch has been pushed to the active position, the Waverunner-2
displays the message “ D evice is Write Protected” on the upper part of the grid whenever the medium
is accessed for writing.

See Chapter 12, “U se Waverunner- 2 with P C ,” for how to transfer files to PC.

96 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


P A R T T WO

L O O KI N G D E E P E R
Part Two of the manual covers the Waverunner-2 features you’ll use for more advanced waveform
operations: RIS and sequence sampling, SMART Trigger, Advanced waveform processing.
It also looks deeper into operations already covered in Part One.
Use Part Two as an advanced guide and a reference for understanding important functions of your
digital oscilloscope.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 97


C H APT E R SE VE N : A Question of Timebase
In Part One you saw how to adjust and set up timebase. N ext, take a closer look at the
Waverunner-2 timebase sampling modes.

In this chapter, see how

To choose a sampling mode

To use single-shot or RIS modes

To use sequence mode

To sample externally

98 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SE VE N A Questionof Timebase

Choose a Sampling Mode


Depending on your timebase, you can choose any of three sampling modes: single-shot, RIS (Random
Interleaved Sampling), or roll mode. In addition, on timebases suited to single-shot and roll, the acquisition
memory can be subdivided into user-defined segments to give sequence mode.

SIN GLE -SHOT — WAVE RUN N E R-2’S BASIC CAPTURE TE CHN IQUE
A single-shot acquisition is a series of digitized voltage values sampled on the input signal at a uniform rate. It
is also a series of measured data values associated with a single trigger event. The acquisition is typically
stopped a defined number of samples after this event occurs: a number determined by the selected trigger
delay and measured by the timebase. The waveform’s horizontal position — and waveform display in general
— is determined using the trigger event as the definition of time zero.
You can choose either a pre- or post-trigger delay. Pre-trigger delay is the time from the left-hand edge of the
Waverunner-2 grid forward to the trigger event, while post-trigger delay is the time back to the event. You can
sample the waveform in a range starting well before the trigger event up to the moment the event occurs. This
is 100% pre-trigger, and it allows you to see the waveform leading up to the point at which the trigger
condition was met and the trigger occurred. (Waverunner-2 offers up to one million points of pre-trigger
information.) Post-trigger delay, on the other hand, allows you to sample the waveform starting at the
equivalent of 10 000 divisions after the event occurred.
Because each Waverunner-2 input channel has a dedicated ADC (Analog-to-Digital Converter), the voltage on
each is sampled and measured at the same instant. This allows very reliable time measurements between the
channels.
On fast timebase settings, the maximum single-shot sampling rate is used. But for slower timebases, the
sampling rate is decreased and the number of data samples maintained.
The relationship between Waverunner-2 sample rate, memory and time can be simply defined as:
1
Capture time = × Memory ,
Sample Rate
and
Capture time
= Time Division .
10

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 99


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

RIS — FOR HIGHE R SAMPLE RATE S


RIS (Random Interleaved Sampling) is an acquisition technique that allows effective sampling rates higher than
the maximum single-shot sampling rate. It is used on repetitive waveforms with a stable trigger. The maximum
effective Waverunner-2 sampling rate of 50 GS/ s can be achieved with RIS by making 100 single-shot
acquisitions at 500 MS/ s, for example. The bins thus acquired are positioned approximately 20 ps apart. The
process of acquiring these bins and satisfying the time constraint is a random one. The relative time between
ADC sampling instants and the event trigger provides the necessary variation, measured by the timebase to
5 ps resolution.
It takes the Waverunner-2 30 trigger events to complete a 1 GS/ s RIS acquisition, and 230 events for a
25 GS/ s acquisition. But sometimes the scope needs many more than this. It then interleaves these segments
(Fig. 1) to provide a waveform covering a time interval that is a multiple of the maximum single-shot sampling
rate. However, the real-time interval over which the Waverunner-2 collects the waveform data is much longer,
and depends on the trigger rate and the amount of interleaving required. The oscilloscope is capable of
acquiring approximately 40000 RIS segments per second.

Segment 1

Segment 2

Segment 3

Final capture

F igure 1. Buildup of an R I S waveform.

ROLL — DISPL AY IN RE AL-TIME


The Waverunner-2 roll mode displays in real time incoming points in single-shot acquisitions that have a
sufficiently low data rate. At timebase settings of ≥0.5 s/ div the oscilloscope rolls the incoming data
continuously across the screen until a trigger event is detected and the acquisition is complete. Even when real-
time display is not possible, the data will continue to be acquired. This works in the same way as a strip-chart
recorder: the latest data is used to update the trace display. Waveform math and parameter calculations are
performed on the completed waveforms, after the real-time display has stopped.

100 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SE VE N : A Question of Timebase

SE QUE N CE — WORKIN G WITH SE GME N TS


In sequence mode, the complete waveform consists of a number of fixed-size segments (Fig. 2) acquired in
single-shot mode (see Waverunner-2 specifications for the limits). You select the number of segments to be
captured, and can then select each segment, individually, and use it for processing with Math and Measure tools.
Sequence offers a number of unique capabilities. With it, you can limit dead time between trigger events for
consecutive segments. The Waverunner-2 can capture in fine detail complicated sequences of events over large
time intervals, while ignoring the uninteresting periods between the events. You can also make time
measurements between events on selected segments using the full precision of the acquisition timebase.
Trigger time stamps of 1 ns resolution are given for each of the segments in the Text & Times Status menu.
Each individual segment can be zoomed or used as input to math functions.
The Waverunner-2 uses the sequence timebase setting to determine the capture duration of each segment:
10 x time/ div. The oscilloscope uses this setting — with the desired number of segments, maximum segment
length and total available memory — to determine the actual number of samples or segments, and time or
points. However, the display of the complete waveform with all its segments may not entirely fill the screen.
Sequence mode can also be used in remote operation to take full advantage of the Waverunner-2’s high data
transfer capability (see Chapter 12, “U se Waver unner-2 wit h PC ,” and the R emote Control M anual ).

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 2

Trigger Trigger Trigger

F igure 2. H ow Waverunner-2 captures segments. S ee page 105 for how to obtain a sequence status
summary.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 101


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

PAIRIN G CHAN N E LS (LT374 and LT264 SE RIE S ON L Y)


A pair of channels can be combined on channel 2 or 3, with channels 1 and 4 disabled or available only for triggering.
On these paired channels the maximum sampling rate is doubled and the record length is increased by two times.
Channels arecombined to increase samplerate or memory size or both in order to capture and viewa signal in all its
detail. When combined, thechannels (like the EXT BNC input) that are not involved in the combination remain
available for triggering, even though they are not displayed. It is preferable to select “Automatic” to combine channels
and have theremaining acquisition channels availablefor triggering. The channels available for triggering only would be
indicated by “trig only” in the Acquisition Summary Field.
Refer to the “Acquisition Modes” table in Appendix A for maximum sample rates.

Combining of Channels

102 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SE VE N : A Question of Timebase

Use a Sampling Mode


SE T UP FOR SIN GLE -SHOT OR RIS

SETUP

1. Press and access the TIMEBASE SETUP menus.

2. Use these menus to set up the Waverunner-2 timebase for Single-Shot or


RIS.

Selects Single-Shot for display of data collected during successive


single-shot acquisitions from the input channels, or RIS for a higher
sampling rate with a repetitive input signal and stable trigger.

Selects from an internal or external clock source. See page 106 for
external clock.
Sets the manner in which channels will be interleaved. Select 4 if you
have a signal on each channel; there is no interleaving in this case.
Select 2 if you want two channels combined onto either channel 2 or
channel 3. Select Automatic to have the Waveruner-2 configure itself
to achieve the maximum sample rate and record length, considering
the channels used.

Switches Sequence mode On or Off. Use the knob to


choose the number of segments. See next page.

Selects the maximum number of samples to be


acquired, using the menu knob.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 103


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

SE T UP FOR SE QUE N CE CAPTURE

3. Activate sequence mode using the Sequence menu and then use these
menus to do sequence sampling.
SCOPE
STATUS

T I P: Press and select “Text and Times” to obtain a status


report on a trace or memory’s sequence segment range.

Selects Single-Shot for sequence sampling.

Selects Internal or external — ECL , OV, TTL — clock modes. Select


internal unless you are using an external clock signal (see page 106).
You can select a time-out for sequence mode using the UTILITIES,
Special Modes, and Timebase Trigger menu.

Turns Sequence On or Off. When you select On, turn the


knob to set the number of segments (periods) of the
waveform to be displayed.

Selects with the knob the maximum record length, in


samples, for each sequence segment.

N OT E : In sequence mode: Press the SIN GLE button and the Waverunner-2 will fill the chosen
number of segments and then stop capturing. But if there are not enough trigger events to fill the
segments, the Waverunner-2 will not stop capturing until you press STOP. If you press N ORMAL
the segments will be filled and the data processed and displayed. Then, if more trigger events occur,
the Waverunner-2 will restart capturing from the first segment. When you press AUTO, capturing
will also be restarted from the first segment, if the time between two consecutive triggers exceeds a
selected time-out.
However, avoid any unnecessary button pushing and knob turning in Sequence mode.

104 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SE VE N : A Question of Timebase

OBTAIN A SE QUE N CE STATUS SUMMARY


Display a summary of the status of your sequence acquisition.

SCOPE PRINT
STATUS SCREEN

4. Press to show the STATUS menus. T I P: Press to document your status summary
and make a hard copy. Printing (and storage)
operations will include undisplayed text.
5. Press the soft key to select Text & Times.

Press the S COPE S T A T U S button for a full status summary of your sequence acquisition. U se the
S elect segment menu and its soft key and k nob to scroll down the segment list.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 105


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

OR SAMPLE E XTE RN ALLY


Use an external clock at a fixed frequency (see Appendix) to control and
synchronize the sampling with an external signal source connected to the
Waverunner-2 rear EXT signal input.

This menu is inactive when the external sample clock is being used.
Single-Shot is selected by default.

Specifies the effective threshold for sampling the EXT input: 1.3 V
with E CL , 0.0 V with 0V , or +1.5 V with TTL selected.

Turns Sequence On or Off. Use the knob to set the


number of segments.

Selects with the knob the maximum record length, in


samples, for each segment.

N OT E : E xternal clock modes are available only if the E XT trigger is N OT the trigger source. Trigger
time stamps and the AUTO sequence time-out feature are unavailable when you use an external
clock signal. And inter-segment dead time is N OT guaranteed.
E xternal clock time/ div is expressed in samples per division, as is the trigger delay, which can be
adjusted normally. N o attempt is made to measure the time difference between the trigger and the
external clock, so successive acquisitions of the same signal can appear to jitter on the screen. The
Waverunner-2 requires a number of pulses to recognize the external clock signal. It stops capturing
only when the trigger conditions have been satisfied and the appropriate number of data points have
been accumulated. Any adjustment to the TIME / DIV knob automatically returns the scope
to normal (internal) clock operation.

106 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SE VE N : A Question of Timebase

BLANK PAGE

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 107


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart
More about E dge triggering. And introducing the SMART Trigger range for capturing
complex waveform characteristics.
In this chapter, see how
To hold off with E dge Trigger
To capture rare phenomena with Glitch trigger
To set up an exclusion trigger
To determine trigger level, coupling and slope
To trigger on intervals
To use State and E dge Qualified triggers
To trigger on lost signals using Dropout trigger
To trigger on TV signals
Pattern Trigger

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

108
C H APT E R E IGH T TriggerSmart

Hold Off by Time orEvents


Holdoff is an additional condition of Edge trigger (see Chapter 2, “Simply Trigger ” ). It can be expressed
either as a period of time or an event count. Holdoff disables the trigger circuit for a given period of time or
events after the last trigger occurred. Events are the number of occasions on which the trigger condition is
met. The trigger will again occur when the holdoff has elapsed and the trigger’s other conditions are met. Use
holdoff to obtain a stable trigger for repetitive, composite waveforms. For example, if the number or duration
of sub-signals is known you can disable them by choosing an appropriate holdoff value. Qualified triggers
operate using conditions similar to holdoff (see page 122).

HOLD OFF BY TIME


Sometimes you can achieve a stable display of complex, repetitive waveforms by placing a condition on the
time between each successive trigger event. This time would otherwise be limited only by the input signal, the
coupling, and the Waverunner-2’s bandwidth. Select a positive or negative slope, and a minimum time between
triggers. The trigger is generated when the condition is met after the selected holdoff time, counted from the
last trigger (Fig.1). Any time between 10 ns and 20 s can be selected. The delay is initialized and started on each
trigger.

Trigger Source: Positive Slope

Trigger Trigger Trigger


Event Event Event

Trigger can occur

Hold-off time Hold-off time

Generated Trigger

Trigger initiates Trigger initiates


hold-off timer hold-off timer

F igure 1. E dge T rigger with H oldoff by T ime. T he bold edges on the trigger source indicate that a
positive slope has been selected. T he brok en upward-pointing arrows indicate potential triggers, which
would occur if other conditions are met. T he bold arrows indicate where the triggers actually occur
when the holdoff time has been exceeded.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 109


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

HOLD OFF BY E VE N TS
Select a positive or negative slope and a number of events. An event is the number of times the trigger
condition is met after the last trigger. A trigger is generated when the condition is met after this number,
counted from the last trigger. The count is initialized and started on each trigger. For example, if the selected
event number is two (Fig. 2), the trigger will occur on the third event. From one to 99 999 999 events can be
selected.

Trigger Source: Positive Slope

Trigger E vent E vent Trigger E vent E vent Trigger


E vent #1 #2 E vent #1 #2 E vent

Trigger can occur

Hold-off by 2 events Hold-off by 2 events

Generated Trigger
Trigger
initiates
Trigger initiates hold-off
hold-off timer timer

F igure 2. E dge T rigger with H oldoff by E vents (in this example, two events). T he bold edges on the
trigger source indicate that a positive slope has been selected. T he brok en, upward-pointing arrows
indicate potential triggers, while the bold ones show where triggers actually occur after the holdoff
expires.

110 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

TriggerSMART
You have seen how to trigger on signals using Edge trigger, and the conditions of level, coupling and slope,
and holdoff. The Waverunner-2 also offers a range of sophisticated triggers that enable you to trigger on these
conditions, as well as many other complex waveform characteristics. Use the SMART Trigger range to set
additional qualifications before a trigger is generated. Catch rare phenomena such as glitches or spikes, specific
logic states, or missing bits. Capture intervals, abnormal signals, or TV signals. Trigger on state or edge qualified
events and dropouts.

CATCH A GLITCH
Finding and capturing elusive glitches — abnormally wide pulses in a signal — is simple with the Glitch trigger.

1. Connect your signal to the Waverunner-2.

2. Simultaneously press the second and fifth menu soft keys and to return the scope to its default
power-up settings. Turn off any unwanted displayed trace.

3. Press the soft key for and set Coupling to match the source signal’s impedance.

AUTO STOP
SETUP
4. Press and then to display a normal waveform. Viewing this signal during several captures
would reveal the occasional glitch. The goal of the measurement is to catch this event by setting a trigger
adapted to it.

SETUP

5. Press TRIGGER and then the soft key to select

6. Press the soft key for and display these menus:

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 111


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

Use these menus to set up to trigger on a glitch, or to create an exclusion trigger


(see page 115).

7. Select Glitch to catch pulses of a chosen width. Capture narrow


pulses less than or equal to, or greater than or equal to, a given
time limit: the pulse’s width. You can also set up to exclude or
include certain events (see page 115).

8. Select the trigger source. This could be a signal on a channel, the


line voltage that powers the Waverunner-2 or the EXT connector.

9. Select the coupling for the trigger source.

10. Place the trigger point at the end of a positive or negative slope.
See N OT E this page.

11. Press the soft key to set to On and to trigger if the


pulse is less than or equal to the value set with the
knob (range: 2.5 ns to 20 s). Use in combination
with “width ≥” below.
12. Press the soft key to set to On and to trigger if the
pulse is greater than or equal to the value set with
the knob (range: 2.5 ns to 20 s). Use in combination
with “width ≤,” combined to target glitches within
(“&”) a certain range if the “width ≤” value is
greater than the “width ≥” value. “OR” in the menu
indicates that glitches above or below this range will
be targeted.

N OT E : The Waverunner-2 must first “see”


the pulse before it can tell its width and know
exactly when to trigger. If the glitch on which T I P: Use Persistence to reveal the glitch shape,
you want to trigger is on a negative pulse, then match the trigger level to the level at
choose “Pos” from the at end of menu. But if which the glitch appears.
the glitch is on a positive pulse,
choose “N eg.”

NORMAL

13. Press to arm the scope. Then wait for the trigger condition to become valid. See next page.

112 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

T rigger on a glitch of width ≤ 5.0 ns on the negative slope. H ere, the glitch is mark ed by arrow
cursors on the waveform. T race A on the lower grid is a zoom of the waveform on the top grid.
I nformation on the trigger is given beneath the grid.

N OT E : If, for example, the glitch’s width is lower than the signal’s, set the trigger to a smaller width
than that of the signal. The signal’s width as determined by the Waverunner-2 trigger comparator
depends on the DC trigger level. And if that level were to be set at the middle of a sine wave, for
example, the width could then be considered as the half period. But if the level were higher, the
signal’s width would be considered to be less than the half period.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 113


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

H O W G L I T C H T R I G G E R W O R KS

P ulse smaller than selected pulse width: S elect a maximum pulse width
(F ig. 3). T his glitch trigger is generated on the selected edge when the pulse width is
less than or equal to the selected width.

T he timing for the width is initialized and restarted on the opposite slope to that selected. W idths of
between 2.5 ns and 20 s can be selected, but typically triggering will occur on glitches 2 ns wide.

Trigger Source

Glitch
Width
Glitch
Width
Trigger can occur

Width Width
Selected Selected
Generated Trigger

F igure 3. G litch T rigger: in this example triggering on a pulse width less than or equal to the width
selected. T he brok en upward arrow indicates a potential trigger, while the bold one shows where the
actual trigger occurs.

114 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

CAPTURE RARE PHE N OME N A


Use glitch trigger settings to select width conditions that exclude events falling inside or outside of a selected
width range. Only pulses less than or equal to, or greater than or equal to, this range will generate a trigger
event. The Waverunner-2 initializes the timing for the width and restarts on the slope opposite the selected
edge. You can select the same width values as those for glitch trigger.

1. Connect to Channel 1, for example, a signal whose multiple glitches have a low duty cycle and that cannot
be seen using Edge trigger or Analog Persistence.

2. Press the soft key for and set Coupling to match the source impedance.

AUTO STOP
SETUP
3. Press and then to display a normal waveform. Viewing this signal during several captures
would reveal the occasional glitch. The goal of the measurement is to catch this event by setting a trigger
adapted to it.

SETUP

4. Press TRIGGER and then the soft key to select

5. Press the soft key to to display and set up the Glitch trigger menus.

Set up the trigger to eliminate nominal pulses of a particular width. The Waverunner-2 will then only trigger on
those waveforms that do not have this pulse width.
6. Press the soft key to select 1from the “trigger on” menu.

LEVEL

7. Turn to adjust the trigger’s level to one division from the top of the pulse, for example.

8. Press the soft key to select Pos from the “at end of ” menu, and On from the “width ≤” menu.

9. Turn the knob to set the “≤ width” value.

10. Press the soft key to select On from the “width ≥” menu, and turn the knob to set the ≥ width value.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 115


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

DELAY

11. Turn to set the trigger point close to mid-grid.

NORMAL

12. Press to start triggering.

T I P: Use Analog Persistence to display a


history of your exceptional pulse
captures, such as the one at right.
E nhance your display still further by
combining E xclusion trigger with
Pass/ Fail testing. The trigger speeds the
acquisition of exceptional pulses, while
the mask testing verifies the wave shape.
Store the waveform or print the screen
display to document each pulse
individually.
Display waveform parameter statistics
under the grid for additional information
on the key waveform parameters of these
pulses. Use this new information to
change the trigger setup to concentrate on
acquiring pulses with more specific
characteristics.
E xclusion trigger: Persistence display.

116 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

T O D E T E R M I N E L E V E L , C O U PL I N G, AN D SL O P E
L evel defines the source voltage at which the trigger circuit will generate an event
(a change in the input signal that satisfies the trigger conditions). T he selected
trigger level is associated with the chosen trigger source.
T rigger level is specified in volts and normally remains unchanged when you change the vertical gain
or offset. T he amplitude and range of the trigger level are limited as follows:
± 5 screen divisions with a channel as the trigger source
± 0.5 V with E X T as the trigger source
± 5 V with E X T / 10 as the trigger source
N one with L I N E as the trigger source (zero crossing is used)

C oupling refers to the type of signal coupling at the input of the trigger circuit. A s with the
trigger level, you can select the coupling independently for each source. Change the trigger source and
you may change the coupling. You can choose from these coupling types:
D C : A ll the signal' s frequency components are coupled to the trigger circuit for high-frequency
bursts or where the use of A C coupling would shift the effective trigger level.
AC : T he signal is capacitively coupled; D C levels are rejected and frequencies below 50 H z
attenuated.
L F R E J: T he signal is coupled through a capacitive high-pass filter network , D C is rejected
and signal frequencies below 50 k H z are attenuated. For stable triggering on medium to high
frequency signals.
H F R E J: S ignals are D C coupled to the trigger circuit, and a low-pass filter network
attenuates frequencies above 50 k H z. I t is used for triggering on low frequencies.

Slope determines the direction of the trigger voltage transition used for generating a particular
trigger event. You can choose a positive or negative slope. L ike coupling, the selected slope is
associated with the chosen trigger source.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 117


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

TRIGGE R ON IN TE RVALS
While Glitch trigger performs over the width of a pulse, Interval trigger performs over the width of an interval
— the signal duration (the period) separating two consecutive edges of the same polarity: positive to positive or
negative to negative. Use Interval trigger to capture intervals that fall short of, or exceed, a given time limit. In
addition, you can define a width range to capture any interval that is itself inside or outside the specified range
— an Exclusion trigger by Interval.

Use these menus to set up for triggering on an interval.

1. Select Interval.

2. Select the trigger source.

3. Select the coupling for the trigger source.

4. Place the trigger point on the positive or negative edge of the


selected pulse.

5. Select On to trigger if the pulse is less than or equal


to the value set with the knob (range: 2.5 ns to 20 s).
Use in combination with “width ≥.”

6. Select On to trigger if the pulse is greater than or


equal to the value set with the knob (range: 2.5 ns to
20 s). Use in combination with “width ≤,” combined
to target intervals within (“&”) a certain range if the
“width ≤” value is greater than the “width ≥” value.
OR in the menu indicates that intervals above or
below this range will be targeted.

118 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

H O W I N T E R V A L T R I G G E R S WO R K

I nterval Smaller: For this I nterval T rigger, generated on a time interval smaller
than the one selected, choose a maximum interval between two like edges of the
same slope — positive, for example (F ig. 4).
T he trigger is generated on the second (positive) edge if it occurs within the selected interval. T he
Waverunner-2 initializes and restarts the timing for the interval whenever the selected edge occurs.
You can select an interval of between 10 ns and 20 s.

Trigger Source: Positive Slope

Interval
Interval Width
Width

Trigger can occur

Selected Selected
Interval Interval

Generated Trigger

F igure 4. I nterval T rigger that triggers when the interval width is smaller than the selected interval.
T he brok en, upward-pointing arrow indicates a potential trigger, while the bold one shows where the
actual trigger occurs — on the positive edge within the selected interval.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 119


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

I nterval L arger: F or this I nterval T rigger, generated on an interval larger than the one selected,
select a minimum interval between two edges of the same slope (F ig. 5). T he Waverunner-2 generates
the trigger on the second edge if it occurs after the selected interval. T he timing for the interval is
initialized and restarted whenever the selected edge occurs. You can select intervals of between 10 ns
and 20 s.

Trigger Source: Positive Slope

Interval
Interval Width
Width

Trigger can occur

Selected Selected
Interval Interval

Generated Trigger

F igure 5. I nterval T rigger that triggers when the interval width is larger than the selected interval.
T he brok en upward-pointing arrow indicates a potential trigger, while the bold one shows where the
actual trigger occurs — on the positive edge after the selected interval.

120 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

I nterval B etween R ange: This I nterval T rigger is generated whenever an


interval between two edges of the same slope falls within a selected range (Fig. 6).
T he Waverunner-2 initializes and restarts the timing for the interval whenever the
selected edge occurs. You can select intervals of between 10 ns and 20 s.

Trigger Source: Positive Slope

Interval
Interval Width
Width

Trigger can occur

Range Range

0 T1 T2 0 T1 T2
Generated Trigger

F igure 6. I nterval T rigger that triggers when the interval falls within the selected range:
T 1= range’s lower time limit; T 2= range’s upper limit. T he brok en upward pointing arrow indicates a
potential trigger, while the bold one indicates where the actual trigger occurs — on the positive edge
within the selected range.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 121


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

QUALIFY A SIGN AL
Use a signal’s transition above or below a given level — its validation — as an enabling (qualifying) condition
for a second signal that is the trigger source. These are Qualified triggers. With State Qualified trigger, the
amplitude of the first signal must remain in the desired state until the trigger occurs. While for Edge Qualified
trigger the validation is sufficient and no additional requirement is placed on the first signal. A Qualified trigger
can occur immediately after the validation or within a set time after it. Or it can occur following a
predetermined time delay or number of potential trigger events. The time delay or trigger count is restarted
with every validation.
Use these menus to set up an Edge or State Qualified trigger.

1. Select Qualified.

2. Select E dge or State as the qualifier. (Set conditions such as the


coupling, slope, and holdoff using the Edge trigger menus.)

3. Select the trigger source. This could be a channel, EXT, or


EXT 10.

4. Select the qualifier source. If you select Pattern, you must first
have set up the pattern using Pattern trigger (see page 130).

5. Turn to adjust the qualifier threshold, and press to


determine whether the qualifier signal is valid once it
“has gone” (Edge Qualified) or “goes and stays”
(State Qualified) above or below that threshold.
6. Specify the time limit (“within” T <) for accepting
the trigger event. Or, specify the delay in time
(“wait” T >) or number of trigger events (“wait”
E vs) after a valid transition has occurred. A trigger
can only be accepted after this delay. Any subsequent
qualifier event restarts the count. The time value can
be set in the range 10 ns–20 s. The trigger event
count can be set in the range 1–99999999.

122 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

H O W Q UA L I F I E D T R I G G E R S W O R K

State Q ualified and Wait (F ig. 7) is determined by the parameters of T ime or


E vents.

T ime determines a delay from the start of the desired pattern. A fter the delay (timeout) and while
the pattern is present, a trigger can occur. T he timing for the delay is restarted when the selected
pattern begins.

E vents determines a minimum number of events of the trigger source. A n event is generated when a
trigger source meets its trigger conditions. On the selected event of the trigger source and while the
pattern is present, a trigger can occur. T he count is initialized and started whenever the selected
pattern begins, and continues while the pattern remains. W hen the selected count is reached, the
trigger occurs.

Trigger Source: Positive Slope

Qualifier: Pattern Present

Trigger can occur

Wait Wait
Generated Trigger

F igure 7. S tate Qualified and Wait: T rigger after timeout. T he broken upward pointing arrows
indicate potential triggers, while the bold arrows show where the actual triggers occurs.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 123


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

E dg e Q ualified and Wait (F ig. 8) is also conditioned by either T ime or E vents:

T ime determines a delay from the start of the desired pattern. A fter the delay (timeout) and before
the end of the pattern, a trigger can occur. T he timing for the delay is restarted when the selected
pattern begins.

E vents determines a minimum number of events for the trigger source. A n event is generated when
a trigger source meets its trigger conditions. A trigger can occur on the selected event of the trigger
source and before the end of the pattern. T he count is initialized and started whenever the selected
pattern begins. I t continues while the pattern remains. W hen the selected count is reached, the trigger
occurs.

Trigger Source: Positive Slope

Qualifier: Pattern Present

Trigger can occur

Selected Selected
Time Time

Generated Trigger

F igure 8. E dge Qualified and Wait: T rigger after timeout. T he brok en upward pointing arrows
indicate potential triggers, while the bold ones show where the actual trigger occurs.

124 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

TRIGGE R ON LOST SIGNAL S


Use Dropout trigger whenever your signal disappears for a set period of time. The trigger is generated at the
end of the timeout period following the “last” trigger source transition (Fig. 9, page 127). Timeouts of between
25 ns and 20 s can be selected. Dropout trigger is used essentially for single-shot applications — usually with a
pre-trigger delay.
1. Connect the signal to be measured to Channel 1.

2. Press the soft key for and set Coupling to match the source impedance.

AUTO
SETUP
3. Press twice to display the waveform. The following steps set the Dropout trigger to capture only the
“last normal” period of the signal and transient signal.

SETUP

4. Press TRIGGER and then the soft key to select

5. Press the soft key for to display the menus shown on the next page.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 125


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

Use these menus to set up the Dropout trigger.

6. Select Dropout.

T I P: Use Dropout Trigger when viewing signals on more than


one channel (you can view the signal characteristics on a channel
other than the trigger source). To trigger the scope when a signal
disappears, make the timeout longer than the signal period. The
Waverunner-2 will not trigger when the repetitive signal is active,
because two successive edges occur in a single period.

7. Select the trigger source.

8. Select the slope.

9. Turn to set the timeout (25 ns by default).

DELAY

10. Turn to set the trigger point to allow display of the signal’s “last normal” period.

When the signal disappears, the Waverunner-2 triggers.

126 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

H O W D R O P O U T T R I G G E R W O R KS

Trigger Source

Trigger can occur


Wait Time- Wait Time-
out out

Generated Trigger

F igure 9. D ropout T rigger: occurs when the timeout has expired. T he bold upward-pointing arrows
show where the trigger occurs.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 127


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

TRIGGE R ON TV SIGN ALS


The Waverunner-2’s TV triggers provide stable triggering on standard or custom composite video signals. Use
them on PAL, SECAM, or NTSC systems. A composite video signal on the trigger input is analyzed to provide
a signal for the beginning of the chosen field — “any,” “odd,” or “even” — and for a signal at the beginning of
each line. The field signal provides the starting transition, and the beginnings of line pulses are counted to
allow the final trigger on the chosen line. Each field, the number of fields, the field rate, interlace factor, and
number of lines per picture must be specified — although there are standard settings for the most common
types of TV signals. TV Trigger can also function in a simple any-line mode.
Use these menus to set up a TV trigger.

1. Select TV-Pos or TV-N eg polarity.

2. Select the trigger source.

3. Specify the number of fields or define the field number..

4. Select Standard or Custom TV decoding.

5. Standard: Select either 625/50/2:1(PAL, SECAM) or


525/60/2:1(NTSC) standard. Custom: Specify the
number of lines and cycles, and set the interlacing
factor for non-standard TV signals.
6. Defines the line on which to trigger. Keep turning
the knob counterclockwise to count down to any,
which allows you to trigger on any line number.

A turn of the knob clockwise also displays a “Field”


number. You can change it by pressing the soft key
to move the cursor to "Field,” then turning the knob
to select the desired field. The Field count depends
on the “# of fields” selection above.

128 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

T O U SE T V T R I GGE R S

M ost T V systems have more than two fields. T he Waverunner-2’s enhanced field
counting capability (F I E L D L OC K) allows you to trigger consistently on a chosen
line within a signal field.
T he field numbering system is relative: the oscilloscope will trigger on 1, 2, 4, or 8 fields.
625/ 50/ 2:1 (PAL and SE C AM systems): U se for most of the standard 50-field signals. T he
lines can be selected in the range 1 to 626 where line 626 is identical to line 1.
525/ 60/ 2:1 (N T SC systems): U se for standard 60-field N T S C signals. T he lines can be
selected in the range 1 to 1051, where line 1051 is identical to line 1.
?/ 50/ ?, ?/ 60/ ?: For maximum flexibility, no line-counting convention is used. T he line count
should be thought of as a line-synchronizing pulse count. I t includes the transitions of the
equalizing pulses. I n certain extreme cases, the field transition recognition will no longer work , and
only the “ any line” mode will be available.

T he enhanced field counting capability C A N N OT be used for R I S acquisitions.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 129


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

PATTE RN TRIGGE R
Pattern Trigger enables triggering on a logical combination of the five inputs CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, CH 4, and
EXT. This combination, called a pattern, is defined as the logical AND of trigger states. A trigger state is either
high or low: high when a trigger source is greater than the trigger level (threshold) and low when less than it.
For example, a pattern could be defined as present when the trigger state for CH 1 is high, CH 2 is low, and
EXT is irrelevant (X or don’t care). If any one of these conditions is not met, the pattern state is considered
absent. Holdoff limits from 10 ns to 20 s or from 1 to 99999999 events can be selected.

1. Select Pattern.

2. Choose whether to trigger when a waveform enters or exits the


pattern.

3. Select each channel, and set the coupling, logic level, and voltage
for each. See below.

4. Set the coupling for the channel selected in “Pattern with” above.

5. Set the logic level and voltage for the channel selected
in “Pattern with” above: high (H), low (L), or don’t
care (X).

6. Use the soft key to select Time or E vts. Turn the


knob to set a value from 10 ns to 20 s, or from 1 to
99 999 999 events.

130 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

Pattern Applications
Pattern Trigger can be used in digital design for the testing of complex logic inputs or data transmission buses.

Threshold High
CH 1 Low

Threshold High
CH 2 Low
Pattern 1H*2L

Generated Trigger (Pattern Entering)

Generated Trigger (Pattern Exiting)

Pattern Trigger: Triggers when all pattern conditions are met. Bold arrows pointing
upward show where triggers occur. Information summarizing the pattern setup is
displayed.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 131


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

MoreAboutPatternTrigger
Once the pattern is defined, one of two transitions can be used to generate the trigger. When the pattern begins, called
enteringthe pattern, a trigger can be generated. Alternatively, a trigger can be generated when the pattern ends, called
exitingthe pattern.
With pattern triggering, as in single source, either of these qualifications can be selected: Holdoff for 10 ns to 20 s, or
Holdoff for up to 99 999 999 events.
When set to Pattern Trigger, the oscilloscope always checks the logic AND of the defined input logic states.
However, with the help of de Morgan's theorem, the pattern becomes far more generalized.
Consider the important example of the Bi-level or WindowPattern Trigger. Bi-level implies the expectation of a
single-shot signal’s going in either direction outside a known amplitude range. To set up a Bi-level Pattern trigger,
connect the signal to two inputs: Channels 1 and 2, or any other pair that can be triggered on. For example, the
threshold of CH 1 could be set to +100 mV and that of CH 2 at −200 mV. The Bi-level Trigger will occur if the
oscilloscope triggers on CH 1 for any pulse greater than +100 mV, or on CH 2 for any pulse less than –200 mV. For
improved precision, the gains of the two channels should be at the same setting.
In Boolean notation we can write:
Trigger = CH 1 + CH 2
that is, trigger when entering the pattern CH 1 = high OR CH 2 = low.
By de Morgan's theorem this is equivalent to:

Trigger = CH 1⋅ CH 2
that is, trigger when exiting the pattern CH 1 = lowAND CH 2 = high. This configuration can be easily
programmed.
The possibility of setting the threshold individually for each channel extends this method so that it becomes a more
general WindowTrigger: in order to trigger the input pulse amplitude must lie within or outside a given arbitrary
window.
Pattern Trigger has been designed to allowa choice of the trigger point. By choosing 1L *2H entering, the trigger will
occur at the moment the pattern 1L*2H becomes true.

132 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

RUN T TRIGGE R
This trigger is available with the optional Advanced Trigger Package.

1. Select Runt.

2. Select the trigger source.

3. Select the trigger coupling.

4. Use Level to set the upper and lower voltage thresholds through
which the runt must pass. Use Width to set minimum or
maximum time limits. Use E dge to set the trigger to occur at the
end of a negative or positive runt pulse.

5. Enable runt ≤ to set the upper time limit.

6. Enable & runt ≥ to set the lower time limit. If the


number you dial in is greater than that set for
runt ≤, this function becomes OR runt ≥.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 133


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

SLE W RATE TRIGGE R


This trigger is available with the optional Advanced Trigger Package.

1. Select Slew Rate.

2. Select the trigger source.

3. Select the trigger coupling.

4. Use dV to set the upper and lower voltage thresholds. Use dT to


set minimum or maximum time limits. Use Slope to define the
slope as negative or positive.

5. Enable dT ≤ to set the upper time limit.

6. Enable & dT ≥ to set the lower time limit. If the


number you dial in is greater than that set for
dT ≤, this function becomes OR dT ≥.

134 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T : TriggerSmart

BLANK PAGE

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 135


C H APT E R N IN E : Display More
Chapter 3 showed how to set up the display and use persistence. N ow learn how to get
more from your display.

In this chapter, see how

Analog Persistence works

To use advanced color management tools

To change your palettes and pick colors

To set up XY display

To use cursors in XY display

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

136
C H APT E R N IN E Display More

Transform YourVision
ANALOG
PERSIST

Press the green button and transform your vision of the waveform. With the brightness levels of a
single color, the Waverunner-2 Analog Persistence feature shows relative signal intensities “three
dimensionally” to reveal signal evolution over time. It offers you an analog view of the waveform with all the
advantages of a digital oscilloscope. Color Graded persistence works in a similar way using a color spectrum to
map signal intensity. Both Waverunner-2 persistence modes are infinite or variable with decay over time.

A nalog Persistence display of a signal with elements of a variable frequency of occurrence.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 137


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

H O W A N A L O G P E R S I S T E N C E W O R KS
L eC roy’s A nalog Persistence feature offers the advantages of analog display in a
D S O (D igital S torage Oscilloscope). T he display look s lik e analog and is fast, too.
But it has the data manipulation, flexibility, and statistical analysis capabilities
only found in a digital instrument.

W ith traditional analog instruments, data manipulation and the direct comparison of acquisitions is
practically impossible. S tatistical analysis is difficult to perform too. N evertheless, analog does have
certain advantages. Because there is no need for analog-to-digital conversion, the speed of the analog
scope is limited only by the bandwidth of its electronics: signals are monitored almost continuously.
T he standard D S O must capture signals across the time period allowed by the size of its acquisition
memory, then process and display their representation. T he time needed to process the previous
acquisition normally limits D S O speed.
But the A nalog Persistence digital oscilloscope is different. I t decouples data accumulation from
display, accumulating and displaying new data more quick ly. M oreover, the persistence is variable.
T he display is generated by repeated sampling of the amplitudes of events over time, and the
accumulation of the sampled data into three-dimensional display maps. T hese maps create an analog-
style display. U ser-definable persistence duration can be used to view how the maps evolve
proportionally over time. S tatistical integrity is preserved because the duration, or decay, is
proportional to the persistence population for each amplitude or time combination in the data. I n
addition, the A nalog Persistence scope provides user definable, post-acquisition saturation control of
the maps, allowing you to draw detail from the display.
W hen you select “A nalog” from the U sing persistence menu, each channel and its associated
persistence data map are assigned a single color. A s a persistence data map develops, different shades
of its color are assigned to the population ranges between a minimum and a maximum population.
T he maximum population automatically gets the brightest shading, the zero or smallest population
gets the dark est shading or the back ground color, and the population ranges between zero and the
maximum population gets the shades in between these.
T he information in the lower populations, or down at the noise level (random transients rather than
dominant signals) could interest you more than the rest. T he A nalog Persistence view highlights the
distribution of data so that you can more easily examine it in detail.
You can select a saturation level or population as a percentage of the maximum population. A ll
populations above the saturation population are then assigned the brightest shade: that is, they are
saturated. A t the same time, all populations below the saturation level are assigned the remaining
shades from brightest down to darkest.
D ata populations and their displayed shades are dynamically updated as data from new acquisitions
is accumulated.

138 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E : Display More

T O D I S P L AY C O L O R - G R A D E D P E R S I S T E N C E
Color-G raded persistence follows the same principles as the A nalog Persistence
feature, but uses not one, but many, colors to map signal intensity. W hen you select
“ Color G raded” from the U sing persistence menu, instead of the brightness of a
single color as in the A nalog Persistence view, the Waverunner-2 uses a color
spectrum from red through violet to display persistence.

T he same waveform as that shown on page 137 displayed using C olor-G raded persistence shows the
persistence waveform in a spectrum of colors rather than shades of a single color.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 139


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

“Paint” YourDisplay
Personalize your Waverunner-2 display by choosing from a range of tools, techniques, and color schemes.

1. In the DISPLAY SETUP menus, press the soft key for to access these menus.

2. Use them to change color schemes and choose advanced color management
tools.

Activates the screen saver. See “F irst T hings.”

Selects either a pre-set, default (1–6) or customized (U1–U4) color


scheme. Choose a custom scheme; the menu below appears. Also
selects a scheme for copying to. See next page.

Accesses the CHANGE COLORS menus when a user-defined scheme


(U1–U4) is selected above. See next page.

Turns Full Screen On and expand the grid display to fill the entire
screen, Off to return to the normal display.

Selects Opaque or Transparent mode, in which objects are always


visible. Overlapping regions are distinguished by a new and unique
color.
Activates the Measure Gate function. Objects of lesser
interest given the color “neutral” will be automatically
relegated to the area outside a region. Objects inside this
measurement-gate region are thus highlighted.

Shows data, or sample, points either as N ormal or Bold.

In Full Screen, removes all menus from the screen. The menus will
reappear when any darker, labeled, front panel button is pressed.

140 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E : Display More

CHAN GE YOUR PALE TTE


3. Select a user-defined color scheme (U1–U4) from the preceding menu, then press the soft key for

.
Create your own color scheme; assign colors to traces, grids, or any other on-
screen object; or copy a default scheme into a custom one to make personalizing
quicker and easier.

Selects one of the a pre-set, default (1–6) or customized (U1–U4) color


schemes, and copy it to another User scheme. This creates a palette
that can then be more easily personalized.

Copies the scheme selected in the menu above to the User color
scheme selected in the Color Scheme menu shown on the preceding
page.

Selects the displayed object to be assigned a color using the menu


below (see next page).

Selects the color to be assigned to the object selected in


the “Change” menu (see page 143).

Returns to the MORE DISPLAY menus.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 141


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

T O A S S I G N C O L O R S T O O N - S C R E E N O B JE C T S

B ackg round — back ground color of the entire display area

T race 1...4 — color assigned to traces displaying Channel 1, 2, or 3 or 4

T race A...D — color assigned to T race A , B, C, or D

G rid — default color of the grid

Text — color assigned to menus, acquisition status and non-single source measurements

C ursors — color assigned to cursors

Warnings — color assigned to error and warning messages

N eutral — color designated as neutral (can be any in user palettes) for measure-gate-region
highlighting

O verlays — color assigned to the menus overlaid on the grid when in F ull S creen mode.

142 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E : Display More

T O CH OOSE COL OR S
C hoose from this g allery of colors for your U 1, U 2, U 3, and U 4
custom palettes.

T I P: Personalize your color


schemes: for traces, grids, text
and menus, cursors, neutral
color, background, warnings,
and overlays. See the previous
page.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 143


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

Set Up XY Display
XY display is for traces that have the same time- or frequency-span (time/ div), expressed using the same
horizontal unit, in seconds or Hertz. The XY display offers three special grid styles: XY only, XY Single and
XY Dual, illustrated on the next page.
DISPLAY

1. Press for the DISPLAY SETUP menus.


2. Press the soft key to select XY from the top menu.

3. Use these menus to set up your XY display, and to access other display setup
menus if desired.

Selects “Standard” or XY.


ANALOG
PERSIST

Turns persistence on or off. Or press

Accesses XY persistence menus: for choosing Analog or Color-Graded


persistence, and persistence saturation in XY display.

Accesses more display setup menus. See page 140.

Selects grid style and number. See next page.

Adjusts waveform and text brightness, using the knob. To


return to the default intensity, press the soft key.

Adjusts grid intensity using the knob only. Grids can be


brightened, or blended with displayed traces. To return to
the default intensity, press the soft key.

144 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E : Display More

A nalog Persistence vector diagram on X Y Only grid. Below: X Y Only, S ingle and D ual grids.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 145


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

T O U S E C U R S O R S I N XY D I S P L AY

Cursors are different in X Y display (see Chapter 4, “ C hoose a M easure Tool,” for
cursors in general).

A bsolute A mplitude cursors are horizontal and vertical bars that can be moved up and down and from
side to side across the screen. X Y R elative A mplitude cursors are pairs of bars that move in the same
way.

A bsolute and R elative T ime cursors behave in X Y as they do in S tandard display.

Combinations of the amplitude values are shown on the left-hand side of the grid in the following top-
to-bottom order:

“ ∆ Y value / ∆ X value” : R atio

“ 20 ∗ log 10 (ratio)” : R atio in dB units

“ ∆ Y value ∗ ∆ X value” : P roduct

“ φ = arc tan (∆ Y / ∆ X ) range [ – 180° to + 180° ] ” : Angle (polar)

“ r = sqrt (∆ X ∗ ∆ X + ∆ Y ∗ ∆ Y )” : R adius (distance to orig in).

146 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E : Display More

T he definition of ∆ X and ∆ Y depends on which cursor you use. T he table below


shows how ∆ X and ∆ Y are defined for each type of cursor measurement.

XY C U R S O R S
T Abs
AAbs ARel Org = VXOffset T Rel
Org = (0,0)
VYOffset

∆X VXRef – 0 VXDif – VXRef VXRef – 0 VXRef – VXOffset VXDif – VXRef

∆Y VYRef – 0 VYDif – VYRef VYRef – 0 VYRef – VYOffset VYDif – VYRef

W here the terms signify:


A A b s : A bsolute A mplitude cursors
A R e l : R elative A mplitude cursors
T A b s : A bsolute T ime cursors
T R el : R elative T ime cursors
O rg: Origin
V X ref : V oltage of the R eference cursor on the X trace
V Y re f : V oltage of the R eference cursor on the Y trace
V X d i f : V oltage of the D ifference cursor on the X trace
V Yd i f : V oltage of the D ifference cursor on the Y trace

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 147


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools
You have seen how to use Waverunner-2 math tools. N ow look deeper into waveform
processing and apply the scope’s advanced math features.

In this chapter, see how

To process extrema waveforms

To perform enhanced resolution filtering

To rescale your waveform

To do more with FFT

To use a math function

To plot parameter trends

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

148
C H APT E R T E N Use Advanced Math Tools

Compute Extrema Waveforms


Use extrema to view a trace envelope of numerous sweeps. Your Waverunner-2 scope repeatedly compares the
maxima (roof) and minima (floor) values of new waveforms with those of already accumulated extrema
records. Whenever the oscilloscope finds that a given data point of a new waveform is greater than the
corresponding roof record value, or less than the floor record value, it replaces that record value with the new
one. The Waverunner-2 thus accumulates the maximum and the minimum envelope of all waveform records.

1. Press to select CHANNEL 1 and display the Waverunner-2 basic menus.

2. Press the soft key to

3. Press to select and set up Trace A.

3. Press the soft key for

5. Press the soft key to select and display the SETUP OF A menus.

6. Then press the soft key to select “Extrema” from the Math Type menu.

T I P: You can change the view of the envelope at


7. Press the soft key to select
anytime without affecting the accumulated data.

E nvelope shows the entire envelope, while Floor and Roof show only the lower and upper parts of the
envelope. Changing these limits will not restart the analysis.

8. Turn the upper knob to set the number of sweeps:

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 149


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

9. Press the soft key to select the source trace:

T O DO E XT R E M A
Your Waverunner-2 scope will stop accumulating whenever the selected maximum
number of sweeps is reached. You can interrupt this process by changing the trigger
mode from N OR M A L to S T OP (by pressing the S T OP button), or by turning off the
function trace. A ccumulation will continue when you perform the reverse action.
R eset the currently accumulated extrema waveform by either pressing CL E A R S WE E PS , or
changing a parameter such as gain, offset, coupling, trigger condition, or your timebase or bandwidth
limit. T he Waverunner-2 displays the number of currently accumulated waveforms in the displayed
trace label of the zoom trace on which the extrema function is performed. You can display roof and
floor records either individually or together.
W henever the maximum number of sweeps is reached, you can accumulate an even larger number
simply by changing the value in the S E T U P for menu. H owever, leave the other parameters
unchanged, or the calculation will be restarted.

T I P: The Waverunner-2 avoids being slowed down by computing a particular math


function only when that function’s trace is turned on. Despite this, waveform
processing can take some time when there are many data points. Cut this delay by
limiting the number of data points used in the computation. The Waverunner-2 will
process the entire waveform by taking every nth point — where n depends on the
timebase and the desired maximum number of points. The first point taken is
always the data value at the left-hand edge of the display.

150 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

Rescale and AssignUnits


This advanced math tool allows you to apply a multiplication factor (a), and additive constant (b), to your
waveform. You can do it in the unit of your choice, depending on the type of application.
1. Follow the steps for setting up to do math on Trace A, B, C or D.
2. Press the soft key to select Rescale from the Math Type menu.
3. Select a or b from the next menu, below Math Type.
4. Press the soft key to select the mantissa, exponent, or number of digits; turn the knob to set its value.
5. If you wish, go back and select [units]. A new menu, called “units = ” will then appear. You can choose
from a wide range of units for your value, including Amps, Celsius, Hertz, decibels, Kelvin, Ohms, Volts,
and Watts.

6. Press the soft key to select the source trace for filtering:

T O D O AV E R AGI N G: SU M M E D V S C O N T I N U O U S
S ummed A veraging is the repeated addition, with equal weight, of successive source
waveform records. I f a stable trigger is available, the resulting average has a random
noise component lower than that of a single-shot record. W henever the maximum
number of sweeps is reached, the averaging process stops.
A n even larger number can be accumulated simply by changing the number in the menu. H owever, the
other parameters must be left unchanged or a new averaging calculation will be started. You can
interrupt the averaging by changing the trigger mode from N OR M to S T OP, or by turning off the
active trace. T he Waverunner-2 resumes averaging when you perform the opposite action to these.
R eset the accumulated average by pushing the CL E A R S WE E PS button or changing an acquisition
parameter such as input gain, offset, coupling, trigger condition, timebase, or bandwidth limit. T he
number of current averaged waveforms of the function, or its zoom, is shown in the displayed trace
label. W hen summed averaging is performed, the display is updated at a reduced rate — about once
every 1.5 s — in order to increase the averaging speed (points and events per second).
C ontinuous Averag ing is the repeated addition, with unequal weight, of successive source
waveforms. I t is particularly useful for reducing noise on signals that drift very slowly in time or
amplitude. T he most recently acquired waveform has more weight than all the previously acquired
ones: the continuous average is dominated by the statistical fluctuations of the most recently acquired
waveform. T he weight of ‘old’ waveforms in the continuous average gradually tends to zero (following
an exponential rule) at a rate that decreases as the weight increases.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 151


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

Enhance Resolution
ERES (E nhanced Resolution) filtering increases vertical resolution, allowing you to distinguish closely spaced
voltage levels. Waverunner-2 ERES is similar to smoothing the signal with a simple, moving-average filter.
However, it is more efficient, both in terms of bandwidth and pass-band. Use ERES on single-shot waveforms,
or where the data record is slowly repetitive — when you can’t use averaging. Use it to reduce noise when your
signal is noticeably noisy, but you don’t need to perform noise measurements. Use it, too, when you perform
high-precision voltage measurements: zooming with high vertical gain, for example.

1. Follow the steps for setting up to do math on Trace A, B, C, or D.

2. Then press the soft key to select E nh. Res from the Math Type menu:

3. Press the soft key to select 1.5 bits, for example, from

This menu allows you to choose a filter that will enhance the resolution of the displayed signal by from one to
three bits, in steps of 0.5 bits.

4. Press the soft key to select the source trace for filtering:

T I P: Depending on your sampling speed, the Waverunner-2


digital filters can affect bandwidth. If you need bandwidth at slow
Result: See illustration next page. timebases, use Averaging with repetitive sampling.

152 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

T he glitch in the waveform displayed on the top grid has been clearly eliminated by E R E S : the result
is the waveform on the lower grid. T race B’s label indicates this as the filtered waveform. A nd the
information field below the grids tells you that T race B is an E R E S function of Channel 2, that the
waveform has been enhanced by 3 bits, and that filtering has reduced the number of points from
2000 to 1885 (see N O T E on page 155) and the bandwidth to 32 M H z.

H O W T H E W AV E R U N N E R - 2 E N H A N C E S R E S O L U T I O N
T he Waverunner-2’s enhanced resolution feature improves vertical resolution by a
fixed amount for each filter. T his real increase in resolution occurs whether or not the
signal is noisy, or your signal is single-shot or repetitive. T he signal-to-noise ratio
(S N R ) improvement you gain is dependent on the form of the noise in the original
signal. T he enhanced resolution filtering decreases the bandwidth of the signal,
filtering out some of the noise.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 153


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

T he Waverunner-2’s constant phase F I R (F inite I mpulse-R esponse) filters provide fast computation,
excellent step response in 0.5 bit steps, and minimum bandwidth reduction for resolution
improvements of between 0.5 and 3 bits. E ach step corresponds to a bandwidth reduction of a
factor of two, allowing easy control of the bandwidth resolution trade-off. T he parameters of the
six filters are given in the following table.

W ith low-pass filters, the


–3 DB
R E SOL U T I ON F IL T E R L E N GT H actual S N R increase obtained
B A N D WI D T H
I N CR E ASE D B Y (S A M P L E S ) in any particular situation
× N YQ U I S T )
(× depends on the power spectral
density of the noise on the
0.5 0.5 2 signal.

T he improvement in S N R
1.0 0.241 5
corresponds to the improvement
in resolution if the noise in the
1.5 0.121 10 signal is white — evenly
distributed across the frequency
spectrum.
2.0 0.058 24
I f the noise power is biased
towards high frequencies, the
2.5 0.029 51 S N R improvement will be
better than the resolution
3.0 0.016 117 improvement.

T he opposite may be true if the noise is mostly at lower frequencies. S N R improvement due to the
removal of coherent noise signals — feed-through of clock signals, for example — is determined by
the fall of the dominant frequency components of the signal in the passband. T his is easily
ascertained using spectral analysis.T he filters have a precisely constant zero-phase response. T his has
two benefits. F irst, the filters do not distort the relative position of different events in the waveform,
even if the events’ frequency content is different. S econd, because the waveforms are stored, the delay
normally associated with filtering (between the input and output waveforms) can be exactly
compensated during the computation of the filtered waveform.

T he filters have been given exact unity gain at low frequency. E nhanced resolution should therefore
not cause overflow if the source data is not overflowed. I f part of the source trace were to overflow,
filtering would be allowed, but the results in the vicinity of the overflowed data — the filter impulse
response length — would be incorrect. T his is because in some circumstances an overflow may be a
spik e of only one or two samples, and the energy in this spik e may not be enough to significantly
affect the results. I t would then be undesirable to disallow the whole trace.
T he examples on the following page illustrate how you might use the Waverunner-2’s enhanced
resolution function.

154 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

I n low- pass filtering: T he spectrum of a square signal before (above left) and after (above right)
enhanced resolution processing. T he result clearly illustrates how the filter rejects high-frequency
components from the signal. T he higher the bit enhancement, the lower the resulting bandwidth.

To increase vertical resolution: I n the example at


right, the lower (“ inner” ) trace has been significantly
enhanced by a three-bit enhanced resolution function.

To reduce noise: T he example below shows enhanced


resolution of a noisy signal.T he original trace (below left)
has been processed by a two-bit enhanced resolution filter.
T he result (below right) shows a “ smooth” trace, where most
of the noise has been eliminated.

N OT E : E nhanced resolution can only improve the resolution of a trace; it cannot improve the
accuracy or linearity of the original quantization. The pass-band will cause signal attenuation for
signals near the cut-off frequency. The highest frequencies passed may be slightly attenuated. Perform
the filtering on finite record lengths. Data will be lost at the start and end of the waveform: the trace
will be slightly shorter after filtering. The number of samples lost is exactly equal to the length of the
impulse response of the filter used — between two and 117 samples. N ormally this loss — just 0.2 % of
a 50 000 point trace — is not noticed. However, you might filter a record so short there would be no
data output. In that case, however, the Waverunner-2 would not allow you to use the E RE S
feature.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 155


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

Do More withFFT
In Part One (Chapter 5, “U se M at h Tools” ) we looked at how to use Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) to
display and measure signals in the frequency domain. Now see how to use the optional FFT Average feature,
and how to set up an FFT span to improve resolution. Valuable hints on how to get even more from this tool
are also given here.

DO FFT AVE RAGE


1. Follow the steps for setting up to do math on Trace A, B, C, or D.

2. Press the soft key to select FFT AVG from the Math Type menu.

3. Press the soft key to select an FFT function to average. Select Power Spect, for example, and you can define
a function as the power average of FFT spectra, computed by another FFT function.
CLEAR
SWEEPS

4. Press to reset FFT average and show the number of currently accumulated waveforms in the
displayed trace field of the math trace or its zoom.

W hen F F T or F F T A veraging is
used, the memory status field
beneath the grid shows the
parameters of the waveform
descriptor.

DO ADDITION AL PROCE SSIN G T I P: To increase the FFT frequency range — the


N yquist frequency — raise the effective sampling
You can perform other math and waveform frequency by increasing the maximum number of
processing functions, such as averaging or points or using a faster time base.
arithmetic, before doing FFT. For example: if a
stable trigger were available you could perform To increase the FFT frequency resolution, increase
time-domain averaging to reduce random noise the length of the time-domain waveform record by
in the signal. using a slower timebase.

USE CURSORS WITH FFT


Move the absolute time cursor into the frequency domain to read the amplitude and frequency of a data point.
Do this by moving it beyond the right-hand edge of a time-domain waveform. Then move the relative time
cursors into the frequency domain to simultaneously indicate the frequency difference and the amplitude
difference between two points on each frequency-domain trace. Use the absolute voltage cursor to read the

156 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

absolute value of a point in a spectrum in the appropriate units. And adjust the relative Voltage cursors to
indicate the difference between two levels on each trace.

N OT E : The following FFT-related error messages may appear at the top of the screen:
“Incompatible input record type” – FFT Average done on a function not defined as FFT.
“Horizontal units don’t match” – FFT of a frequency-domain waveform is not available.
“FFT source data zero filled” – If there are invalid data points in the source waveform (at the
beginning or at the end of the record), these are replaced by zeros before FFT processing.
“FFT source data over/ underflow” – The source waveform data has been clipped in amplitude,
either in the acquisition — gain too high or inappropriate offset — or in previous processing. The
resulting FFT contains harmonic components that would not be present in the unclipped
waveform. The settings that define the acquisition or processing should be changed indirectly by
means of another function or expansion. One of the definitions should be changed to eliminate
the over/ underflow condition.
“Circular computation” – A function definition is circular (i.e., the function is its own source).

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 157


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

T O S E T U P F F T S PA N A N D R E S O L U T I O N

T o set up an F F T correctly, start with the frequency resolution, or ∆ f. T his is the


spacing of samples in the frequency domain display. S et the ∆ f by inputting the time
duration of the time domain signal to the F F T .
I f an acquisition channel (C hannel 1, 2, or 3 or 4) is the source, then the waveform duration is the
capture time: the T I M E / D I V setting multiplied by 10. I f the source waveform is a zoom trace, the
frequency resolution is the reciprocal of the displayed waveform’s duration. T he relationship between
capture time and frequency resolution is illustrated below (F ig. 1).

CAPTURED WAVEFORM

TIME
AMPLITUDE

CAPTU RE T IME
= 10 X T IME / DIV

FREQUENCY
RESOLUTION
∆f
∆ f = 1/ CAPTURE TIME
AMPLITUDE

FREQUENCY
FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM (FFT)

F igure 1. Capture time determines the frequency resolution ∆ .

T he frequency span of the F F T is called the N yquist frequency, and is related to the sampling
frequency of the time domain waveform. I f the math memory size is identical to the number of
samples in the acquired waveform, then the span will be half the sampling frequency. But if this
“ max points for math” number is less than the number of points, the waveform and the F F T span
will be decimated. T he relationship between the F F T span and the sampling rate (1/ ∆ T ) is
illustrated on the next page (F ig. 2).

158 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

CAPTURED WAVEFORM

AMPLITUDE TIME

∆T
SAMPLING PERIOD

FREQUENCY SPAN

FRE QUE N CY SPAN = K* (1/ ∆ T)


AMPLITUDE

FREQUENCY
FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM (FFT)

F igure 2. T he span of the F F T is related to the sampling rate (1/ ∆ T ).

T he Waverunner-2 automatically adjusts the span, and the F F T transform size, to account for the
“ max points for math” you enter, as well as the display scaling. T he scope may also adjust the length
of the displayed trace. You can read the span in the displayed trace label for the trace with F F T ,
with the horizontal calibration in H z/ div. I t is also displayed as the N yquist frequency in the
information field that appears at the bottom of the screen when you set up for F F T .

SE T FFT SPAN
1. To obtain the FFT span you want, first make sure that your sampling rate is more than twice the span
desired. Control the sampling rate, then set the acquisition memory length. You could further adjust the
sampling rate by limiting the number of points. For example, to analyze a continuous periodic waveform,
you may wish to have a span of 10 MHz and frequency resolution of 10 kHz. That frequency resolution
would require a capture time of 100 µs. You would therefore set the time per division to 10 µs to obtain
the necessary ∆f of 10 kHz. You would need an effective sampling rate of greater than 20 MS/ s in order
to obtain the required 10 MHz span. On a Waverunner-2 scope with a sampling rate of 500 MS/ s and a
50 000-sample default memory length, you would use a 10 µs time/ div setting to first give a 250 MHz
span.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 159


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

TIME / DIV

s ns T I P: Of the two methods proposed in


Step 3 below, the second is preferable
because it maintains a high input
2. Turn and set time per division to 10 µs. sampling rate and reduces the risk of
aliasing the captured data.

Then, to obtain the 10 MHz span, reduce the sampling rate in either of two ways:

SETUP

3. Press and decrease the number of samples by setting the “record up to” menu to 2500 in a
sampling rate of 25 MS/ s.

Alternatively, use to limit the number of points to 2500. Choosing this method
would leave the sampling rate at 500 MS/ s but decimate the waveform data before the FFT to reduce the
effective sampling rate to 25 MS/ s. This would in turn give a span of 12.5 MHz, the closest achievable
span to > 10 MHz.

A sampling rate of 25 MS/ s would result in a full-scale range of 12.5 MHz (1.25 MHz per division). To
maintain a display scale factor of 1, 2, or 5, your Waverunner-2 scope would decimate the acquired waveform
and calculate the FFT using a 2000-point transform. This would result in a scale factor of 2 MHz/ Div. The
display would be truncated at 6.25 divisions to retain the original 12.5 MHz span.

F F T WI N D O W F I L T E R P A R A M E T E R S
Highest Side Scallop Loss E N BW Coherent Gain
Window Type
Lobe (dB) (dB) (bins) (dB)
Rectangular –13 3.92 1.0 0.0
von Hann –32 1.42 1.5 –6.02
Hamming –43 1.78 1.37 –5.35
Flat Top –44 0.01 2.96 –11.05
Blackman–Harris –67 1.13 1.71 –7.53

160 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

Use anAdvanced MathFunction


These functions allow you to automatically carry out complex computations N OT E : The Waverunner-2
on your signal. See Chapter 5, “U se M at h Tools,” for the full range of computes square root on the
standard and optional math functions. To choose and use a function: absolute value of the
waveform. For logarithmic
and exponential functions, it
1. Follow the steps for setting up to do math on Trace A, B, C, or D. uses the input signal’s
numerical value without units.
2. Then use these menus to choose and use an advanced math function.

Selects to do math.

Selects Functions.

N OT E : When you use


Integral, your source signal
can be offset by an additive
Selects Integral, for example.
constant in the range −1016 to
+1016 times the vertical unit of
the signal.

Sets the signal offset to compensate for any


DC offset in the signal.

Selects the source waveform.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 161


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

Resample to Deskew
Deskew whenever you need to compensate for different lengths of cables, probes or anything else that causes
timing mismatches between signals. Resample a signal on one channel and adjust it in time relative to a signal
on another.
1. Display the signals on two different channels.

2. Press to make a zoom of the channel whose signal you wish to adjust in time.

3. Use these menus to deskew the signal.

Enables math.

Selects Resample.

By means of the knob, adjusts the signal on Trace A in the


range ±2000 ns, and compensates for the timing differences
between it and the other signal.

Selects the channel whose signal you wish to adjust.

162 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

Plot Trends
Plot a line graph of a parameter’s evolution over time using the optional Trend feature (EMM Option). And
eliminate the need to make and record a large number of individual measurements. When you set up the trend
plot, the Waverunner-2 will generate it automatically as the scope takes data, making the measurements and
plotting the values for you. The graph’s vertical axis will be the value of the parameter, and its horizontal axis
the order in which the values were captured. In this way you can graphically display up to 20000 individual
parameter measurements on each trace, using any of more than 100 available parameters as the trend source.
You can also cross-plot two trends on an X-Y display and see the functional relationships between the two
parameters.

1. Set up a custom parameter for the trend. See the next chapter, “A nalyze wit h Paramet er s.”

2. Follow the steps for setting up to do math on Trace A, B, C, or D.

3. Use these and the menus on the next page to create your trend graph.

Enables math.

Selects Trend.

Selects parameters and further configures the trend (see next page).

Positions the trend automatically once calculated. Also centers and


scales the trend without affecting zoom or position settings.

Selects the parameter line to be used in the trend.

Selects (using soft key or knob) the number of values in


the trend. A maximum of 20 000 values can be chosen
for any one trend. When this maximum is exceeded, the
parameter results scroll off the trend.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 163


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

T I P: See the LeCroy Application Briefs (L ABs) covering trend


plots for help in a range of applications. Ask your LeCroy
customer service center, or find these and other useful LABs at
LeCroy’s web site: www.lecroy.com

Selects All: every parameter calculation on each waveform will be


placed in the trend. Or Average: to trend only the average of all the
given values calculated, and obtain one point in the trend, per capture.

Accesses the CHANGE PARAM menus to select or configure a


parameter. See the next chapter, “A nalyze wit h Paramet ers.”

Positions the trend automatically once calculated. Also centers and


scales the trend without affecting zoom or position settings.

Sets the trend’s center value.

Selects the value of each vertical display division. The


height per division multiplied by the number of vertical
display divisions (eight) determines the range of
parameter values centered on the number in the
“Center” menu, used to create the trend.

Returns to the previous menu group.

164 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

RE AD TRE N DS
Once the trend plot is displayed, trace labels like the ones below — for Trace A in these examples — appear in
their customary place on-screen, identifying the trace and the math performed, and giving horizontal and
vertical information.

N umber of events per horizontal division


U nits per vertical division, in units of the parameter being measured
V ertical value at point in trend at cursor location when using cursors
N umber of events in trend that are within unzoomed horizontal
display range

Percentage of values lying beyond the unzoomed vertical range when


not in cursor measurement mode

TIM E

EV EN TS

F igure 3. A trend’s horizontal axis is in units of events, with the earlier events in the leftmost part
of the waveform and later ones on the right. T he vertical axis is in the same units as the trended
parameter.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 165


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

T O CAL CU L AT E T R E N DS

Once you have configured the trend, parameter values will be calculated and trended on
each subsequent capture.
T he trend values will be calculated immediately following the capture. T he resulting trend is a
waveform of data points that can be used in the same way as any other waveform. Parameters can be
calculated on it, and it can be zoomed; it can serve as the x or y trace in an X Y plot, or be used in
cursor measurements.
T he sequence for acquiring trend data is:
1. T rigger
2. Waveform capture
3. Parameter calculation(s)
4. T rend update
5. T rigger re-arm

I f you set the timebase in a mode other than sequence, a single acquisition occurs prior to parameter
calculations. H owever, in sequence mode an acquisition for each segment occurs prior to parameter
calculations. I f the source of the trend data is a memory, when you save new data to memory, this
acts as a trigger and acquisition. Because updating the screen can tak e significant processing time,
the process occurs only once a second, minimizing trigger dead time (and under remote control the
display can be turned off to maximize measurement speed).
T he Waverunner-2 oscilloscope maintains a circular parameter buffer of the last 20 000
measurements made, including values that fall outside the set trend range. I f the maximum number
of events to be used in a trend is a number ‘N ’ less than 20 000, the trend will be continuously
updated with the last ‘N ’ events as new acquisitions occur. I f the maximum number is greater than
20 000, the trend will be updated until the number of events is equal to ‘N ’. T hen, if the number
of bins or the trend range is modified, the scope will use the parameter buffer values to redraw the
trend with either the last ‘N ’ or 20 000 values acquired — whichever is the lesser. T his parameter
allows trends to be redisplayed using an acquired set of values and settings that produce a
distribution shape with the most useful information. Once it is in buffer, you can display the trend
in different scaling ranges without reacquiring data.
I n many cases the optimal range is not readily apparent. F or this reason the scope has a powerful
range finding function: F I N D C E N T E R A N D H E I G H T (see page 164). I f necessary, it will
examine the values in the parameter buffer to calculate an optimal range, and use it to redisplay the
trend. T he Waverunner-2 will also give a running count of the number of parameter values that fall
within, below, and above the range. I f any fall below or above the range, the range finder can then
recalculate to include these parameter values, as long as they are still within the buffer.
T he number of events captured per waveform acquisition or display sweep depends on the parameter
type. A cquisitions are initiated by the occurrence of a trigger event. S weeps are equivalent to the

166 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T E N : Use Advanced Math Tools

waveform captured and displayed on an input channel. For non-segmented waveforms a capture is the
same as a sweep, whereas for segmented waveforms an acquisition occurs for each segment and a sweep
is equivalent to captures for all segments. Only the section of a waveform between the parameter
cursors is used in the calculation of parameter values and corresponding trend events. T he table
provides a summary of the number of trend events captured per acquisition or sweep for each
standard parameter and for a waveform section between the parameter cursors.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 167


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters
Part One introduced Waverunner-2 Measure Tools. N ow use their advanced aspects to
troubleshoot and analyze your waveform.

In this chapter, see how

To customize parameters

To perform Pass/ Fail tests

Parameters work

E ach parameter plays a special role in measurement

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

168
C H APT E R E L E VE N Analyze with Parameters

Use Custom Parameters


1. Press then select Measure to display the MEASURE menus.

2. Press the soft key for Custom in the “mode” menu. Use statistics if desired, and set the starting and end
point for the parameter measurements using the “from” and “to” menus.

3. Then press the soft key to select and access the CHANGE PARAM menus.

4. Use them to change your parameters.

Selects a line, and the parameter allocated to it, for modification. Five
lines with five unique parameters can be displayed and modified.

Selects the parameter category.

Deletes all five assigned parameters from the lines.

To place a new parameter for measurement on the line selected above.


When “--” is selected, that line is not used.

Selects the channel or trace on which the parameter will be


measured.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 169


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

CUSTOMIZE A PARAME TE R
You can customize certain parameters to meet special needs:
1. Take, for example, ∆ time at level, a parameter that computes the transition between different levels of a
waveform, or between different sources.
2. Press the soft key to select the All category, and the soft key to choose ∆t@ lv from the measure menu.

3. Turn the upper knob to set the number of sweeps:

4. Press the soft key to select channel or memory Turn the knob for from and to.

5. Then press the soft key to select

From the SETUP of ∆t@ lv menus then displayed:


6. Press the soft key to set levels in either absolute or peak-to-peak percent signal values:

7. Press the soft key to set the hysteresis in divisions. This is a voltage band that extends equidistantly above
and below the selected level. In order for the signal to be considered valid, and not as noise, the signal
must exceed, or cross, the upper or lower limits of this band by half the hysteresis division setting.
8. Turn the knob to set the voltage or amplitude percent level in the “from” menu.
This determines where on the waveform the Waverunner-2 will start the timing measurement.
9. Press the soft key to make the measurement on a positive (rising) or negative (falling) edge. Or, with First,
to make it on either edge.
10. Finally, turn the knob to set the voltage or amplitude percentage in the “to” menu.
This determines the level on the waveform at which the timing is to end.
11. Press the soft key to end the measurement on a positive (rising) or negative (falling) edge. Or, with First,
to end it on either edge.

170 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters

Test forPass and Fail


You can also use parameters to carry out Pass/ Fail tests. These require a combination of measurements within
chosen limits. The Waverunner-2 invokes an action when the test passes or fails — depending on what you
specify. You can also test signals against a tolerance mask. As with custom parameters, you can use as many as
five parameters at the same time. Whether the tests pass or fail, any or all of the following actions can be
invoked:
Stop capturing further signals
Dump the screen image to a hardcopy unit
Store selected traces to internal memory, to an optional device in the PC Card slot, or to floppy disk
Sound the buzzer
Emit a pulse through the rear BNC connector

The display will show you the results on the current waveforms, the number of passing events, the total
number of sweeps treated, and the actions for you to take.

SE T UP A PASS/ FAIL TE ST

1. Set up for parameters in the ME ASURE menu as shown in Chapter 4 and on the preceding pages.

Press then select Pass/ Fail.


2. From the “mode” menu select Pass or Fail. Set the starting and ending points for the parameter
measurements using the “from” and “to” menus.

3. Press the soft key to select

4. Select a parameter line.

5. Press the soft key to select Param from the Test on menu for testing using that parameter; “---” for no
test.
6. And press the soft key to select Param from the choose menu.
7. Set the other menus displayed as desired, according to the description on page 169.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 171


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

8. Then if you wish to change the Pass/ Fail test limit on the parameter, press the soft key to select Limit
from the choose menu.
9. Press the soft key to select the adequate relation — smaller or greater than — from:

10. Then press the soft key to select from one of three possible modifications to the

limit.
These are the limit’s mantissa, exponent, and the number of digits to be represented in its mantissa.
11. Turn the knob to set the value for these.

12. Finally, press the bottom soft key to set the limit to the latest measured value — a starting value for the
final adjustment.

PASS/ FAIL TE ST ON A MASK

1. Follow the CHANGE TEST Steps 1 to 5 described above.


2. Press the soft key to select Mask from the “Test on” menu for testing using that parameter; “---” for no
test.

3. Press the soft key to select the mask test condition from

4. Press the soft key to select the mask test condition from

5. Press the soft key to select the channel or trace for testing from the of menu, and the soft key for the trace
on which the mask is to be placed from the mask menu.

N OT E : Pass/ Fail testing against a mask is affected by horizontal and vertical zooming of the mask
trace. The test will be made inside the area bordered by the parameter cursors. Timebases of the mask
and the trace under test should be identical. For visual mask testing, use a single grid when performing
a mask test on a single trace; dual-grid display for testing on two traces.

172 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters

MAKE A WAVE FORM MASK

1. Press the soft key to select from the mask menus described

above.
2. Use these menus to generate a mask from your waveform.

Select W’form to generate the mask from your displayed waveform; Card
to display menus for recalling a mask stored to an optional device in the
PC Card slot; Floppy to recall a stored mask from floppy disk.

Selects D= M4 if the mask is to be automatically displayed on the screen.


Otherwise select M1, M2, M3, or M4. Use the “RECALL W’FORM”
menus to recall and display a memory on a trace.

Generates an inverted mask.

Selects the waveform to be used as the reference. The Waverunner-2 will


generate the mask around this.

Makes the mask.

Selects the tolerance in amplitude with the knob.

Selects the tolerance in time with the knob.

CHAN GE A TE ST ACTION
1. From the CHANGE TEST menus press the soft key to select Action in the On line.

2. Press the soft key to determine if the action will be taken on Pass or Fail:

3. Press the soft key to select the action in the “Then” menu. And press the soft key to activate (Yes) or
disable (N o) this action in the final menu, now named for the action chosen. This yes or no is in turn
shown in “Then.”

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 173


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

H O W T H E W AV E R U N N E R - 2 P A R A M E T E R S W O R K

Proper determination of the top and base reference lines is fundamental for ensuring
correct parameter calculations. T he analysis begins with the Waverunner-2 computing a
histogram of the waveform data over the time interval spanned by the left and right
time cursors.

For example, the histogram of a waveform transitioning in two states will contain two peak s (F ig.
1). T he analysis will attempt to identify the two clusters that contain the largest data density. T hen
the most probable state (centroids) associated with these two clusters will be computed to determine
the top and base reference levels: the top line corresponds to the top and the base line to the bottom
centroid. Once top and base are estimated, the Waverunner-2 easily calculates the rise and fall
times. T he oscilloscope automatically determines the 90% and 10% threshold levels, using the
amplitude (ampl) parameter. (H istograms are part of the WaveA nalyzer option.)

maximum

*not to scale
top
Upper Threshold
(90 % Amplitude)

HISTOGRAM*
50 % (Mesial)
pkpk
ampl

L ower Threshold
(10 % Amplitude)
base
minimum

rise fall
width
LE FT CURSOR RIGHT CURSOR
F igure 1.

T hreshold levels for rise or fall time can also be selected using absolute or relative settings (r@ level,
f@ level). I f absolute settings are chosen, the rise or fall time is measured as the time interval
separating the two crossing points on a rising or falling edge. But when relative settings are chosen,
the vertical interval spanned between the base and top lines is subdivided into a percentile scale
(base = 0%, top = 100%) to determine the vertical position of the crossing points.

174 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters

T he time interval separating the

∑ (Tr )
Mr
R ising E dge 1 points on the rising or falling edges
i −Tr i
90 10
D uration Mr is then estimated to yield the rise or
i =1
fall time. T hese results are averaged
over the number of transition edges

∑ (Tf )
Falling E dge 1
Mf that occur within the observation
i −Tf i
10 90
D uration window.
Mf i =1
T ime parameter measurements such as width,
period and delay are carried out with respect to the
W here M r is the number of rising edges mesial reference level (F ig. 2), located halfway
found, M f the number of falling edges found, (50%) between the top and base reference lines.
T ime parameter estimation depends on the number
Tri x the time when rising edge i crosses the x% of cycles included within the observation window.
level, andTfi x the time when falling edge i I f the number of cycles is not an integer,
crosses the x% level. parameter measurements such as rms or mean will
be biased.

first last
delay

width width width

50 %
(Mesial)

PERIOD PE RIOD
freq = 1/ period duty = width/ period

TWO FULL PE RIODS: cycles = 2

cmean, cmedian, crms, csdev


computed on integral periods TRIGGE R
POIN T
area, points, data
LE FT CURSOR computed between cursors RIGHT CURSOR

F igure 2.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 175


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

T o avoid these bias effects, the instrument uses cyclic parameters, including crms and
cmean, that restrict the calculation to an integer number of cycles. T he Waverunner-2
enables accurate differential time measurements between two traces — for example,
propagation, setup and hold delays (F ig. 3). Parameters such as ∆ c2d± require the
transition polarity of the clock and data signals to be specified.

Noisy spikes ignored due


to Hysteresis band

HYSTE RESIS
THRESHOLD
Band
DATA (1)

CL K (2)
∆c2d-(1, 2)

∆c2d+ (1, 2)

LE FT CURSOR RIGHT CURSOR


TRIGGE R POIN T

CLOCK E DGE = Positive Transition


DATA E DGE = Negative Transition

F igure 3.

M oreover, a hysteresis range may be specified to ignore any spurious transition that does not exceed
the boundaries of the hysteresis interval. I n F igure 3, ∆ c2d− (1, 2) measures the time interval
separating the rising edge of the clock (trigger) from the first negative transition of the data signal.
S imilarly, ∆ c2d+ (1, 2) measures the time interval between the trigger and the next transition of
the data signal.

176 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters

Choose a Parameter
The following table lists, describes and defines the Waverunner-2 parameters. Those indicated by the
symbol are in the Extended Math and WaveAnalyzer options (see Chapter 5, “U se a M at h T ool” ). All the
other parameters listed here are standard on the Waverunner-2.

PARAMETER DE SCR I PT I ON DE FIN IT ION N OT E S

ampl Amplitude: Measures difference between top − base On signals N OT having two
upper and lower levels in two-level signals. (See Fig. 1) major levels (such as triangle or
Differs from pk pk in that noise, overshoot, saw-tooth waves), returns same
undershoot, and ringing do NOT affect value as pkpk.
measurement.
area Integral of data: Computes area of Sum from first to
waveform between cursors relative to zero last of data multiplied
level. Values greater than zero contribute by horizontal time
positively to the area; values less than zero between points
negatively. (See Fig. 2)
base Lower of two most probable states (higher Value of most On signals N OT having two
is top). Measures lower level in two-level probable lower state major levels (triangle or saw-
signals. Differs from min in that noise, (See Fig. 1) tooth waves, for example),
overshoot, undershoot, and ringing do NOT returns same value as min.
affect measurement.
cycles Determines number of cycles of a periodic Number of cycles of
waveform lying between cursors. First cycle periodic waveform
begins at first transition after the left cursor. (See Fig. 2)
Transition may be positive- or negative-
going.
cmean Cyclic mean: Computes the average of Average of data
waveform data. Contrary to mean, values of an integral
computes average over an integral number number of periods
of cycles, eliminating bias caused by
fractional intervals.
cmedian Cyclic median: Computes average of base Data value for which
and top values over an integral number of 50 % of values are
cycles, contrary to median, eliminating bias above and 50 %
caused by fractional intervals. below

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 177


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

PARAMETER DE SCR I PT I ON DE FIN IT ION N OT E S

crms Cyclic root mean square: Computes square N Where: vi denotes measured


root of sum of squares of data values 1 sample values, and N = number
divided by number of points. Contrary to
(v i ) 2
N of data points within the periods
rms, calculation is performed over an i =1
found up to maximum of 100
integral number of cycles, eliminating bias periods.
caused by fractional intervals.
csdev Cyclic standard deviation: Standard N Where: vi denotes measured

1
deviation of data values from mean value ( v i − mean )2 sample values, and N = number
N i =1
over integral number of periods. Contrary of data points within the periods
to sdev, calculation is performed over an found up to maximum of 100
integral number of cycles, eliminating bias periods.
caused by fractional intervals.
delay Time from trigger to transition: Measures Time between trigger
time between trigger and first 50% crossing and first 50% crossing
after left cursor. Can measure propagation after left cursor
delay between two signals by triggering on (See Fig. 2)
one and determining delay of other.
∆ dly ∆delay: Computes time between 50% level Time between
of two sources. midpoint transition of
two sources
∆ t@ lv ∆t at level: Computes transition between Time between R eference levels and edge-
selected levels or sources. transition levels of transition polarity can be
two sources, or from selected. H ysteresis argument
trigger to transition used to discriminate levels from
level of a single noise in data.
source
∆ c2d±
± ∆clock to data ±: Computes difference in Time from clock T hreshold levels of clock and
time from clock threshold crossing to either threshold crossing to data signals, and edge transition
the next (∆c2d+) or previous (∆c2d−) data next or previous edge polarity can be selected.
threshold crossing. (See Fig. 3) H ysteresis argument used to
differentiate peak s from noise in
data, with good hysteresis value
between half expected peak -to-
peak value of signal and twice
expected peak -to-peak value of
noise.

178 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters

PARAMETER DE SCR I PT I ON DE FIN IT ION N OT E S

dur For single sweep waveforms, dur is 0; for Time from first to last
sequence waveforms: time from first to last acquisition: for
segment’s trigger; for single segments of average, histogram or
sequence waveforms: time from previous sequence waveforms
segment’s to current segment’s trigger; for
waveforms produced by a history function:
time from first to last accumulated
waveform’s trigger.
duty Duty cycle: Width as percentage of period. width/ period
(See Fig. 2)
f80–20% Fall 80–20%: Duration of pulse waveform’s Average duration of On signals N OT having two
falling transition from 80% to 20%, falling major levels (triangle or saw-
averaged for all falling transitions between 80–20% transition tooth waves, for example), top
the cursors. and base can default to maximum
and minimum, giving, however,
less predictable results.
Fall at level: Duration of pulse waveform’s Duration of falling On signals N OT having two
f@ level falling edges between transition levels. edge between major levels (triangle or saw-
transition levels tooth waves, for example), top
and base can default to maximum
and minimum, giving, however,
less predictable results.
fall Fall time: Measures time between two Time at lower On signals N OT having two
specified values on falling edges of a threshold minus major levels (triangle or saw-
waveform. Fall times for each edge are Time at upper tooth waves, for example), top
averaged to produce final result. threshold averaged and base can default to maximum
over each falling edge and minimum, giving, however,
AR GU M E N T S (See Fig. 1) less predictable results.
Threshold Remote Lower Upper Default
Limit Limit
Lower Low 1% 45% 10%
Upper High 55% 99% 90%
Thresholdarguments specifytwovertical valueson
eachedgeusedtocomputefall time. Formulas for
upper andlower values:
amp
lower value = lower threshold × + base
100
amp
upper value = upper threshold × + base
100

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 179


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

PARAMETER DE SCR I PT I ON DE FIN IT ION N OT E S

first Indicates value of horizontal axis at left Horizontal axis value I ndicates location of left cursor.
cursor. at left cursor C ursors are interchangeable: for
(See Fig. 2) example, the left cursor may be
moved to the right of the right
cursor and f ir st will give the
location of the cursor formerly on
the right, now on left.
freq Frequency: Period of cyclic signal measured 1/ period
as time between every other pair of 50% (See Fig. 2)
crossings. Starting with first transition after
left cursor, the period is measured for each
transition pair. Values then averaged and
reciprocal used to give frequency.
last Time from trigger to last (rightmost) cursor. Time from trigger to I ndicates location of right cursor.
last cursor C ursors are interchangeable: for
(See Fig. 2) example, the right cursor may be
moved to the left of the left
cursor and f ir st will give the
location of the cursor formerly on
the left, now on right.
maximum Measures highest point in waveform. Unlike Highest value in G ives similar result when applied
top, does NOT assume waveform has two waveform between to time domain waveform or
levels. cursors histogram of data of same
(See Fig. 1) waveform. But with histograms,
result may include contributions
from more than one acquisition.
C omputes horizontal axis
location of rightmost non-zero
bin of histogram — not to be
confused with maxp.
mean Average of data for time domain Average of data G ives similar result when applied
waveform. Computed as centroid of (See Fig. 2) to time domain waveform or
distribution for a histogram. histogram of data of same
waveform. But with histograms,
result may include contributions
from more than one acquisition.
median The average of base and top values. Average of base and
top
(See Fig. 2)

180 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters

PARAMETER DE SCR I PT I ON DE FIN IT ION N OT E S

minimum Measures the lowest point in a waveform. Lowest value in G ives similar result when applied
Unlike base, does NOT assume waveform waveform between to time domain waveform or
has two levels. cursors histogram of data of same
(See Fig. 1) waveform. But with histograms,
result may include contributions
from more than one acquisition.

over− Overshoot negative: Amount of overshoot bbase − minimumg× 100 W aveform must contain at least
following a falling edge, as percentage of ampl one falling edge. On signals N O T
amplitude. having two major levels (triangle
(See Fig. 2) or saw-tooth waves, for example),
may N O T give predictable results.
+
over+ Overshoot positive: Amount of overshoot bmaximum − topg× 100 W aveform must contain at least
following a rising edge specified as ampl one rising edge. On signals N OT
percentage of amplitude. having two major levels (triangle
(See Fig. 1) or saw-tooth waves, for example),
may N O T give predictable results.

∑ (Tr )
period Period of a cyclic signal measured as time 1
Mr Where: M r is the number of
i −Tr i
50 50
between every other pair of 50% crossings. leading edges found, M f the
Starting with first transition after left cursor, Mr i =1 number of trailing edges found,
period is measured for each transition pair, Tri x the time when rising edge i
(See Fig. 2)
with values averaged to give final result.
crosses the x% level, and Tfi x the
time when falling edge i crosses
the x% level.

pkpk Peak-to-peak: Difference between highest maximum minus G ives a similar result when
and lowest points in waveform. Unlike minimum applied to time domain waveform
ampl, does not assume the waveform has (See Fig. 1) or histogram of data of the same
two levels. waveform. But with histograms,
result may include contributions
from more than one acquisition.

phase Phase difference between signal analyzed and Phase difference


signal used as reference. between signal and
reference

points Number of points in the waveform between Number of points


the cursors. between cursors
(See Fig. 2)

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 181


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

PARAMETER DE SCR I PT I ON DE FIN IT ION N OT E S

r20–80% Rise 20% to 80%: Duration of pulse Average duration of On signals N OT having two
waveform’s rising transition from 20% to rising 20–80% major levels (triangle or saw-
80%, averaged for all rising transitions transition tooth waves, for example), top
between the cursors. and base can default to maximum
and minimum, giving, however,
less predictable results.

r@ level Rise at level: Duration of pulse waveform’s Duration of rising On signals N OT having two
rising edges between transition levels. edges between major levels (triangle or saw-
transition levels tooth waves, for example), top
and base can default to maximum
and minimum, giving, however,
less predictable results.

rise Risetime:Measurestimebetweentwospecified Time at upper On signals N OT having two


valuesonwaveform’srisingedge(10–90%).Rise threshold minus Time major levels (triangle or saw-
timesfor eachedgeaveragedtogivefinalresult. at lower threshold tooth waves, for example), top
AR GU M E N T S averaged over each and base can default to maximum
rising edge and minimum, giving, however,
Threshold Remote Lower Upper Default
Limit Limit (See Fig. 1) less predictable results.

Lower Low 1% 45% 10%

Upper High 55% 99% 90%

Thresholdargumentsspecifytwoverticalvalueson
eachedgeusedtocomputerisetime.
Formulasfor upper andlower values:
amp
lower value = lower threshold × + base
100
amp
upper value = upper threshold × + base
100

182 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters

PARAMETER DE SCR I PT I ON DE FIN IT ION N OT E S

rms Root Mean Square of data between the N G ives similar result when applied


cursors — about same as sdev for a zero- 1 to time domain waveform or
mean waveform.
(v i ) 2 histogram of data of same
N i =1 waveform. But with histograms,
result may include contributions
(See Fig. 2)
from more than one acquisition.
Where: vi denotes measured
sample values, and N = number
of data points within the periods
found up to maximum of 100
periods.
sdev Standard deviation of the data between the N G ives similar result when applied

1
cursors — about the same as rms for a ( v i − mean ) 2 to time domain waveform or
N i =1
zero-mean waveform. histogram of data of same
(See Fig. 2) waveform. But with histograms,
result may include contributions
from more than one acquisition.
Where: vi denotes measured
sample values, and N = number
of data points within the periods
found up to maximum of 100
periods.
t@ level Time at level: Time from trigger (t= 0) to Time from trigger to
crossing at a specified level. crossing level

top Higher of two most probable states, the Value of most G ives similar result when applied
lower being base; it is characteristic of probable higher state to time domain waveform or
rectangular waveforms and represents the (See Fig. 1) histogram of data of same
higher most probable state determined from waveform. But with histograms,
the statistical distribution of datapoint result may include contributions
values in the waveform. from more than one acquisition.
width Width of cyclic signal determined by examining Width of first positive S imilar to fwhm, though, unlik e
50% crossings in data input. If first transmission or negative pulse width, that parameter applies
after left cursor is a rising edge, waveform is averaged for all only to histograms.
considered to consist of positive pulses and similar pulses
widththe time between adjacent rising and falling
edges. Conversely, if falling edge, pulses are (See Figs. 1, 2)
considered negative and widththe time between
adjacent falling and rising edges. For both cases,
widths of all waveform pulses averaged for final
result.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 183


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

PARAMETER DE SCR I PT I ON DE FIN IT ION N OT E S

XAMN Determines the horizontal axis location of the Horizontal location of R estricted to time and frequency
minimum value between the cursors. lowest value between domain waveforms only.
cursors.
XAMX Determines the horizontal axis location of the Horizontal location of R estricted to time and frequency
maximum value between the cursors. highest value between domain waveforms only.
cursors.

184 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E L E VE N : Analyze with Parameters

BL A N K PAG E

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 185


C H APT E R T WE L V E : Use Waverunner-2 with PC
Operate your Waverunner-2 scope using a personal computer.
In this chapter, see how
To transfer waveforms and data from scope to computer
To monitor Waverunner-2 remote control operation
To save in ASCII
To use the Waverunner-2 with Spreadsheet, Mathcad and MATLAB

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C

186
C H APT E R T WE L VE Use Waverunner-2 withPC

TransferData and Images to PC


Connect the Waverunner-2 to a personal computer (PC) through the oscilloscope’s rear GPIB or
RS-232-C port. Then use LeCroy’s handy ScopeExplorer software (see next page) to save data or images to the
PC’s hard disk. At the same time, the Waverunner-2’s Remote Control Assistant can monitor and debug all your
remote control communications (see page 189). But first, follow these steps to set up the scope for
communication with the PC:

UTILITY

1. Press and then the soft key for

2. Use these menus to set up communication with the PC via GPIB or RS232.

Selects GPIB or RS232. Select from the other menus according to this.

RS232: Press to select seven- or eight-bit word length for RS232. With
RS232 selected above, the GPIB interface is “talk-only.” Any change is
immediate.

RS232: Press to choose the appropriate RS232 parity.

RS232: Press to select the number of stop bits for RS232.

RS232: Turn the knob to set the Baud Rate for RS232.

GPIB: Press or turn to select the GPIB address.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 187


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

1 N OT CON N E CTE D 1
2 2
AUTO
SETUP
TRIGGER
ZERO DELAY

DELAY
SETUP

LEVEL
STOP AUTO NORMAL SINGLE

OFFSET CHANNEL
SELECT
3 3
4 4
TIME / DIV VOLTS / DIV
s ns V mV

SETUP
TI MEBASE

ZOOM + MATH

5 5
PANELS POSIT ION POSITION

UTILI TIES

RESET

DISPLAY ZOOM ZOOM

MATH

6 6
STANDBY TOO LS

RETURN

MEASURE WAVE SCOPE CLEAR PRINT ANALOG


TOOLS STORAGE STATUS SWEEPS SCREEN PERSIST

ALL INPUTS
50Ω 5Vrms
1MΩ 16pF 400Vpk
CAT II
CAL

7 7
8 8
9 N OT CON N E CTE D 9

R S -232 nine-pin communication cabling for connecting the Waverunner-2 to PC.

E XPLORE YOUR SCOPE


ScopeExplorer is an easy-to-use and practical software tool for interfacing your Waverunner-2 oscilloscope
with computers running Windows. (See also “F ir st T hings” section.)
1. Connect the scope to a PC by using either the GPIB — you’ll need a PC with GPIB card installed — or
PC-standard RS-232-C port on the scope’s rear panel.
2. Download ScopeExplorer free at http:/ / www.lecroy.com/ scopeexplorer. Or inquire at your LeCroy
customer service center.
3. Having installed ScopeExplorer, open it as you would any Windows program. Use its on-line help to:
Use the teletype-like terminal to send standard remote control commands from computer to
oscilloscope. And display the Waverunner-2 response on the PC.
Control the scope using an interactive, virtual scope front panel!
Pipe sequences of commands from a file to the scope, then send the scope’s responses to another file.
(See the R emote Control M anual for the commands.)
Transfer pixel-for-pixel copies of your Waverunner-2 display to PC, view them, print them, or both
from the computer. With a single press of a button or key, you can copy bitmap waveform images to
the Windows Clipboard, ready to paste into any Windows application.
Capture Waverunner-2 front panel setups and store them on the computer with a lengthy filename.
You can then transfer them back into the scope to reproduce an identical setup.
Transfer, too, your waveforms to PC, and store them in either the compact LeCroy Binary format, or
an ASCII version compatible with PC-based analysis products such as Microsoft’s E xcel or MathSoft’s
Mathcad (see page 190).

188 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WE L VE : Use Waverunner-2 with PC

MON ITOR YOUR RE MOTE CON TROL OPE RATION S


Use the Waverunner-2 Remote Control (RC) Assistant to automatically monitor remote commands received
through the GPIB and RS232 ports. RC Assistant helps debug communications with the PC. When activated, it
displays a log of the dialog between oscilloscope and PC. And whenever a communication error occurs, it gives
the additional message “Remote Control: problem detected and logged.”

UTILITY

1. Press to display the UTILITIES menus.

2. Press the soft key for then the soft key for

These menus will appear:

3. Press either of the top two menu soft keys to select one of the
following:
Off — the RC Assistant will NOT capture any remote commands.
E rrors Only — displays only wrong or incomplete commands
received via any remote control port (default after power-on).
Full Dialog — captures all remote commands received via any
remote control port and displays up to 100 lines of dialog, after
which lines are overwritten on a “first–in, first–out” basis.
Log & RS232 — logs the full dialog and sends it to a recording
device connected to the RS-232 port. When this is used, commands
can only be received via the GPIB port.
(See also the commands COMM_HELP and COMM_HELP_LOG in
the R emote C ontrol M anual.)

4. Turn this knob to enable log scrolling; press this soft


key to clear the log entirely.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 189


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

Save Waveforms inASCII


When you save waveforms to a Waverunner-2 internal memory (M1, M2, M3, or M4) you save them in
LeCroy’s special binary format. But you can also store your waveforms in ASCII format to a portable storage
device such as floppy disk, PC memory card or hard disk card. You can then transfer the data to a PC for
analysis with spreadsheet or math software.
In doing this you will create an output file requiring 10–20 times the disk space of the original LeCroy binary
file. A one-megabyte record will typically take up 13–15 MB when stored in ASCII. And ASCII waveforms
cannot be recalled back into the scope.
The Waverunner-2 stores waveforms in any of three ASCII formats: Spreadsheet, Mathcad, or MATL AB. The
following table summarizes the format of the three basic layouts. You’ll see how to set up to save in ASCII on
the next pages, followed by examples of the use of each format.

F ORMAT H E ADE R T IME AMPL ITUDE SE QUE N CE M UL TI- DUAL


VAL UE S VAL UE S T IME S SE GME N T ARRAY
Format Format Format Header Format Format
includes stores time stores contains concatenates allows
some form values with amplitude sequence time multiple dual-array
of header each values information segments of data
before the amplitude for each a sequence (E xtrema
data value sequence waveform or complex
segment F F T ) to be
stored
Spreadsheet Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mathcad Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MATL AB No No Yes No Yes No

190 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WE L VE : Use Waverunner-2 with PC

SAVE IN AN ASCII FORMAT


Store waveforms in ASCII and save them to a floppy disk or optional storage device in the PC Card slot. Save
in an ASCII data format such as Spreadsheet. Then transfer the data to PC.
WAVE
STORAGE

1. Press and then the soft key for

2. Press the soft key to select

3. Then use these and the menus on the next page to save your displayed
waveform to a storage device in an ASCII data format.

Selects ASCII.

Accesses the menu shown on the next page and setup for the preferred
ASCII format.

Selects or turn off automatic storing features: Wrap stores continuously,


discarding the oldest files on a ‘first-in: first-out” basis. Fill stores until
the storage device is full.

Saves the waveform selected to the portable storage device using the
menus below.

Selects the memory in which the waveform to display is


stored.

Selects the storage device on which the waveform will be


stored: floppy disk (Flpy) is standard on all Waverunner-2
models, while a PC memory card or hard disk card in the
rear PC Card slot (Card) is an option.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 191


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

This menu is displayed when you select Setup ASCII Format from the menus
shown on the previous page.

Selects an ASCII format.

Pressto go back to the STORE W’FORM menu and make other


selections.

192 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WE L VE : Use Waverunner-2 with PC

Use ASCII Formats

SAVE TO SPRE ADSHE E T


To read a waveform stored in the Spreadsheet format into Microsoft Excel, use: File -> Open dialog:

Excel’s Text Import Wizard will take you through the following steps:

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 193


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

1. Select Delimited.

2. The Spreadsheet format generated by Waverunner-2


uses “,” to delimit columns. Select Comma. as the
delimiter.

3. The third and final step allows you to specify the


format of the columns. Select the General Column
data format (the default).

194 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WE L VE : Use Waverunner-2 with PC

4. Click the Finish button: a display similar to this one will be shown:

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 195


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

PLOT A WAVE FORM IN SPRE ADSHE E T


Plotting the data from a waveform will demand a scatter plot based on the data in the first two columns, with
the first column used as the X values (from row 6 in this example):

The header created for the spreadsheet contains all the information you’ll need to extract various elements
from a sequence waveform. Use the following formulae to extract information such as the start and end row of
the data for a given segment, or the trigger time of a given segment:
S egmentS tartR ow := (D esiredS egment * D2) + B2 + 5
S egmentE ndR ow := S egmentS tartR ow + D2 –1
T rigT ime= INDIRECT(ADDRESS(D esiredS egment + 3;2;4))
T imeS inceF irstT rig= INDIRE CT(ADDRESS(D esiredS egment + 3;3;4))
Plotting the data from all segments using a scatter plot will result in all segments overlaid, as in the
Waverunner-2’s persistence display of sequence traces.

196 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WE L VE : Use Waverunner-2 with PC

USE MATHCAD
These examples were created using MathSoft’s Mathcad for Windows. Shown on this page is the procedure for
reading and graphing a file for a single segment; the example on page 198 is for multiple segments.
This single-segment example is valid for Mathcad Versions 3.1 to 7:

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 197


P ART T WO : L O O KI N G D E E P E R

This multi-segment Mathcad example demonstrates how to extract data from a given segment. The data
consisted of two segments of three samples each, allowing the entire imported matrix to be shown:

198 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T WE L VE : Use Waverunner-2 with PC

USE MATL AB
This example was created using MathWorks’ MATLAB Version 4.2c.1 for Windows. You can read and graph a
waveform in MATLAB by using two simple commands: the first loads the file into a matrix automatically
named after the file (command window); the second plots this matrix (“Figure No. 1”):

The MATLAB format is simple: it has no header information, only amplitude values. Multiple segments will be
appended without a separator. Only one value from the pair of amplitude values present in a dual-array will be
stored.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 199


BLANK PAGE

200 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


P AR T T H R E E

WA V E A N A L YZ E R

(W A V A O P T I O N )

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 201


C H APT E R T H I R T E E N : Parameters
In this chapter, see how

To set up for histograms

202 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H IR T E E N Parameters

A Valuable Tool forWaveform Analysis


The WaveAnalyzer option added to your Waverunner-2 oscilloscope provides a valuable tool for data analysis
and the interpretation of measurement results: the histogram. With WAVA, histograms of waveform parameter
measurements can be created, statistical parameters determined, and graphic features quantified for analysis.
Statistical parameters such as mean, standard deviation and median are extremely useful, but alone are
usually insufficient for determining whether measured data distribution is as expected (see Chapters 4 and
11). Histograms expand the use of parameters to enhance your understanding by offering visual
assessment of this distribution and revealing: distribution type, such as normal or non-normal, helpful
for determining whether the signal behaves as expected; distribution tails and extreme values, which
can be observed, and which may be related to noise or other infrequent and non-repetitive sources; and
multiple modes, observable and possibly indicative of multiple frequencies or amplitudes, which can be
used to differentiate from other sources such as jitter and noise.

SE T UP FOR HISTOGRAMS
Histograms are based on settings that include bin width and number of parameter events. The Waverunner-2
scope with WAVA uses special parameters for determining histogram characteristics such as mean, median,
standard deviation, number of peaks and most populated bin.
But before you can create a histogram, you must first set up the parameters you have chosen:

1. Press then select Measure to display the MEASURE menus.

2. Select . Use if desired.

3. Set start and end points for the measurements with and

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 203


P ART I I I : WAV E AN AL YZ E R

Parameters are used to perform waveform measurements for the section of a waveform lying between the
parameter cursors (Fig. 1.1, item ➊). The position of the parameter cursors is set using the from and to menus,
and controlled by the associated menu knobs. The top trace in the figure below shows a sine wave on which a
freq parameter measurement (➋) is being performed, with a value of 202.442 kHz as the average frequency.
The bottom trace shows a histogram of this parameter and a value of 201.89 kHz (➌) — the average
frequency of the data contained within the parameter cursors.

2
3

Figure 1.1

4. Press the soft key to select and access the CHANGE PARAM menus.

204 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H IRT E E N : Parameters

As shown in Figure 1.2, up to five parameters can now be selected, each displayed on its own line below the
grid. Categories are provided for related groups of parameter measurements. The freq measure parameter from
the “Cyclic” category for Trace 1, previously selected, is displayed on Line 1 as freq(1) (Item ➊). The avg
measure parameter from the “Statistics” category for Trace A is displayed on Line 2. This category provides
histogram parameters, while avg offers the mean value of the underlying measurements for the Trace A
histogram section within the parameter cursors (➋), shown as “avg(A)” in ➌. Additional parameter
measurements can be selected from “Category” and “measure”. No parameters have been selected for Lines 3
to 5
5. After selecting a category, choose a parameter from the “measure” menu. Then select the parameter
display line from the “On line” menu.

1
3

Figure 1.2

If a parameter has additional settings that you must supply in order to perform measurements, the MORE
‘xxxx’ SE TUP menu appears. But if no additional settings are required the DE LE TE ALL PARAME TE RS
menu appears, as shown here: pressing the associated menu soft key clears the results in all five lines of
parameters.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 205


P ART I I I : WAV E AN AL YZ E R

P A R A M E T E R - V A L U E C A L C U L A T I O N A N D D I S P L AY
Whenyouare not usingpersistence, the display for input channels shows the capturedwaveformof asingle
sweep. For non-segmentedwaveforms, the display is identical toasingle acquisition. But with segmented
waveforms, the result of asingle acquisitionfor all segments is displayed.

The value displayedfor achosenparameter depends onwhether “statistics” is onor off. A nd onwhether the waveformis
segmented. These twofactors inadditiontothe parameter chosendetermine whether results are providedfor asingle acquisition
(trigger) or multiple acquisitions. Ineither case, only the waveformsectionbetweenthe parameter cursors is used.

If the waveformsource is amemory (M1, M2, M3, or M4) thenloadinganewwaveformintomemory acts as atrigger and
sweep. This alsoapplies whenthe waveformsource is azoomof aninput channel, andwhenanewsegment or the “A ll Segments”
menuis selected.

With “statistics” off, the parameter results for the last acquisitionare displayed. This corresponds toresults for the last segment for
segmentedwaveforms with all segments displayed. For zoomtraces of segmentedwaveforms, selectionof anindividual segment gives
the parameter value for the displayedportionof the segment betweenthe parameter cursors. Selectionof “A ll Segments” provides
the parameter results fromthe last segment inthe trace.

With “statistics” on, andwhere the parameter does not use twowaveforms incalculatingaresult (∆dly, ∆t@ lv), results are shown
for all acquisitions since the CL E A R SWE E PS buttonwas last pressed. If the parameter uses twowaveforms, the result of
comparingonly the last segment per sweep for each waveformcontributes tothe statistics.

The statistics for the selectedsegment are displayedfor zoomtraces of segmentedwaveforms. Selectionof anewsegment or “A ll
Segments” acts as anewsweep andthe parameter calculations for the newsegment(s) contribute tothe statistics.

Depending onthe parameter, single or multiple calculations canbe performed for each acquisition. For example, the period
parameter calculates aperiodvalue for each of up tothe first 50 cycles inanacquisition. Whenmultiple calculations are
performed, with “Statistics” Off the parameter result shows the average value of these calculations. Whereas On displays the
average, low, high, andsigmavalues of all the calculations.

206 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H IRT E E N : Parameters

InFigure 1.3, below, the upper trace shows the persistence display of asignal. The initial suggestionis of frequency drift inthe
signal source. The lower trace shows ahistogramof the frequency as measuredby the oscilloscope.

Figure 1.3

This histogramindicates twofrequency distributions with dominant frequencies separatedby 4000 Hz. There are twodistinct and
normal lookingdistributions, without wide variation, withineach of the two. We canconclude that there are twodominant
frequencies. If the problemwere relatedtofrequency drift, the distributionwouldhave atendency tobe broader, non-normal in
appearance, andnormally there wouldnot be twodistinct distributions.

A fter abrief visual analysis, the measurement cursors andstatistical parameters canbe usedtodetermine additional characteristics
of distribution, includingthe most commonfrequency ineach distributionandthe spreadof each distribution.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 207


P ART I I I : WAV E AN AL YZ E R

Figure 1.4, below, shows the use of the measurement cursor (Item ➊), todetermine the frequency representedby one binof the
distribution. The value of the bin, inside the DisplayedTrace Fieldis indicatedby ➋.

2 1

Figure 1.4

208 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H IRT E E N : Parameters

Figure 1.5, below, shows the use of the parameter cursors (Items ➊ and ➋) indeterminingthe average frequency of the
distributionlocatedbetweenthe cursors. The average value of the measurements inthe right-handdistributionis indicatedby ➌.

Figure 1.5

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 209


P ART I I I : WAV E AN AL YZ E R

Finally, Figure 1.6 shows the use of the measurement cursors (Items ➊ and ➋) indeterminingthe difference infrequency between
abininthe center of each distribution. The value inkHz, inthe DisplayedTrace Field, is indicatedby ➌.

3
2

Figure 1.6

210 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H IRT E E N : Parameters

ParameterMath
LeCroy’s WaveAnalyzer option also gives you the ability to perform arithmetic operations (addition,
subtraction, multiplication, division) on the results of two parameter measurements. By customizing parameters
in this way, you can effectively extend the range of parameter measurements based on your particular needs.
For example, suppose you need to measure the crest factor of a waveform. Traditionally, you would select the
peak-to-peak and rms parameters, then manually compute the ratio of peak-to-peak to rms. Figure 1.7, on the
other hand, shows how parameter math was used to configure crest factor as a calculated parameter. The list of
custom parameters comprises 5 calculated parameters labeled calc1through calc5.

Figure 1.7. Calculatedparameters allowthe creationof customparameters. Here calc1 is set up tomeasure crest factor (peak-to-
peak/ rms).

Selecting the calculated parameter calc1from the "measure" parameter menu allows you to set it up, as shown
in Figure 1.8. Here the parameters, source waveforms, and arithmetic operator can be selected. The calc1
parameter has been set up to display the ratio of peak-to-peak to rms for channel 2. This is shown in the
"calc1" summary box under the grid.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 211


P ART I I I : WAV E AN AL YZ E R

Figure 1.8. DefiningCalc1 toReadthe Crest Factor of Channel 2

The five calculated parameters compute new parameters based on any two parameters operating on any
combination of the acquisition channels or math/ zoom traces. The source parameters do not have to be
displayed.
Figure 1.9 is an example of setting up a direct measurement of the modulation index of an FM signal. Phase
modulation has been performed using the JitterTrack™ of time interval error (TIE) of the input signal from
channel 2. Differentiation and rescaling convert the TIE function into the demodulated FM signal. The TIE
function is multiplied by the carrier frequency of 400 MHz. This results in a display of frequency deviation
versus time. Because the ratio of 1/ 2 the peak-to-peak frequency deviation is required for the FM modulation
index, TIE must also be divided by 2. All this is done in Trace D, using the rescale function to multiply by 2*E 8
(400 MHz/ 2). In general, all additive or multiplicative constant operations in the calculated parameters require
the rescale function. (In this example the rescale operation was required anyway.)
Figure 1.10 shows the setup of calculated parameter calc5 to read the FM modulation index by taking 1/ 2 the
peak-to-peak frequency deviation divided by the modulation frequency. Both parameters are derived from
trace D.

212 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H IRT E E N : Parameters

Figure 1.9. UsingRescalingtoConvert TIE toaDisplay of Frequency Deviation

Figure 1.10. SettingCalc5 toMeasure FM ModulationIndex

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 213


P ART I I I : WAV E AN AL YZ E R

LOGARITHMIC PARAME TE RS
The Parameter Math option prevents multiplication and division of parameters that return logarithmic values.
These parameters are as follows:
• auto-correlation signal-to-noise ratio (ACSN)
• narrow-band power (NBPW)
• media signal-to-noise ratio (MSNR)
• residual signal-to-noise ratio (RSNR)
• top-to-base ratio when the units are in dB (TBR)

E XCLUDE D PARAME TE RS
Parameters that are already the result of parameter math operations are excluded, and will not appear in the
parameter menu. If they are included in a remote control setup command, an error message is generated and
the setup canceled.
• Excluded parameters are as follows:
• beginning edge shift (BES)
• beginning edge shift – list (BES)
• beginning edge shift sigma (BESS)
• beginning edge shift sigma – list (BESS)
• delta clock-to-data near (DC2D)
• delta clock-to-data next (DC2DPOS)
• delta clock-to-data previous (DC2DNE G)
• delta delay (DDLY)
• delta pit-to-clock (DP2C)
• delta pit-to-clock – list (DP2C)
• delta pit-to-clock sigma (DP2CS)
• delta pit-to-clock sigma – list (DP2CS)
• delta time at level (DTLEV)
• end edge shift (E ES)
• end edge shift – list (E ES)
• end edge shift sigma (E ESS)
• end edge shift sigma – list (E ESS)
• phase (PHASE )
• resolution (RES)
• apparent power (APWR)
• mTnTmT shift (BE ES)
• mTnTmT shift sigma (BE ESS)
• mTnTmT shift sigma – list (BEE SS)
• power factor (PF)
• real power (RPWR)

214 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R T H IRT E E N : Parameters

TO SE T UP PARAME TE R MATH
1. Press M E ASURE T OOL S.
2. Press the button for "Parameters." The MEASURE menu panel appears.
3. From the "mode" menu, select Custom.
4. Press the button for "Change Parameters." The CHANGE PARAM menu panel appears.
5. From the "On line" menu, select the line (1through 5) below the grid on which you want to show the
calculation result.
6. From the "Category" menu, select All.
7. From the "measure" menu select, calcx (calc1through calc5).
8. Press the button for "More Calcx Setup." The SE TUP CALCx menu panel appears.
9. If the current calc parameter is already defined and you want to redefine it, press the button for "CLEAR
THIS PARAMETER."
10. From the "Operation" menu, select an arithmetic operator (+ , –, * , / ).
11. To set the first parameter in the equation, select Param1from the "Select" menu. Then choose a
parameter from the "Parameter" menu.
12. Set the second parameter in the equation by selecting Parm2 from the "Select" menu. Then choose a
parameter from the "Parameter" menu. Your equation will appear in the summary box below the grid.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 215


P ART I I I : WAV E AN AL YZ E R

BLANK PAGE

216 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U R T E E N Making Histograms

Create and Viewa Histogram


Create your histogram as you would any other Math function: by defining trace A, B, C, or D as the function.
Having connected your signal to a Waverunner-2 channel (Channel 1 in this example), do the following:

1. Press to select CHANNEL 1 and display the basic Waverunner-2 menus.

2. Press the button to and to make Trace A a zoom of Channel 1.

3. Press the button for and select to display SETUP OF A.

4. Use these and the menus on the following pages to set up your histogram.

Enables math.

Selects Histogram.

Selects parameters and further configure the histogram (see next


page).

Calculates optimal center- and bin-width values for the histogram.

Selects the parameter line to be used in the histogram.

Selects — using button or knob — the number of


values in the histogram. When the maximum of two
billion values is exceeded, the parameter results will
scroll off the histogram.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 217


H ISTOGRAMS

T I P: As with any other trace, position ZOOM ZOOM


and expand your histogram using POSITION POSITION
POSITION and ZOOM knobs

Adjusts either the histogram binning or scale settings. When Binning


is selected, the menus shown here appear.

N OT E : When using these knobs, values in the “Center” and


“Width” menus do not change, since they determine the range
of the histogram and cannot be used to determine the
parameter value range of a particular bin. If the histogram is
repositioned using the horizontal POSITION knob the
histogram’s center will be moved from the center of the screen.
(ME ASURE TOOL S should then be used. )

Accesses the CHANGE PARAM menus and select or configure a


parameter for histogramming. See Chapter 11, “Paramet er
A nalysis.”

Calculates optimal center- and bin-width values for the histogram.

Chooses the number of bins into which the parameter


events are to be classified, or distributed.

218 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U RT E E N : M aking H istograms

Adjusts either the histogram binning or scale settings. When Scale is


selected, the menus shown here appear (see page 223).
Sets the vertical scale: Linear sets a linear vertical scale, Log a
logarithmic vertical scale, and LinConstMaxsets the vertical scaling to a
linear value that uses close to the full vertical display capability of the
instrument.
The Waverunner-2 automatically increases the vertical scale setting as
required, ensuring that the highest histogram bar does not exceed the
vertical screen display limit.

Selects parameters and configure the histogram.

Calculates optimal center- and bin-width values for the histogram.

Sets the histogram center value.

Sets the histogram width value per division. The width


per division multiplied by the number of horizontal
display divisions (ten) determines the range of
parameter values centered on the number in the
“Center” menu, used to create the histogram.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 219


H ISTOGRAMS

Figure 2.1, below, shows the display when “Histogram” is selected from the “Math Type” menu. The freq
parameter only has been defined. To define additional parameters, select from the “Histogram custom line”
menu.

F igure 2.1

Each time a waveform parameter value is calculated you can place it in a histogram bin. The maximum number
of such values is selected from the “using up to” menu. Pressing the associated menu button or turning the
knob allows you to select a range from 20 to two billion parameter value calculations for histogram display.

220 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U RT E E N : M aking H istograms

5. Now, press to display the histogram, for a display similar to that shown in Figure 2.2.

F igure 2.2

Each histogram is set to capture parameter values falling within a specified range. As the scope captures the
values in this range the bin counts will increase. Those values not falling within the range are not used in the
histogram.
Information on the histogram is provided in the Displayed trace field (Item ➊) for the selected trace, which
shows:
The current horizontal per division setting for the histogram (“1 Hz” in this example). The unit type used
is determined by the waveform parameter type on which the histogram is based.
The vertical scale in # bin counts per division (here, “200 m”).
The number of parameter values that fall within the range (“inside 0”)
The percentage that fall below (“←0%”)
The percentage of values above the range (“100%→”).

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 221


H ISTOGRAMS

The previous figure shows that 100% of the captured events are above the range of bin values set for the
histogram. As a result, the baseline of the histogram graph (➋) is displayed, but no values appear.
Selecting the “FIND CENTE R AND WIDTH” menu calculates the optimal center and bin-width values,
based on the up-to-the-most-recent parameter values calculated. Choose the number of parameter calculations
with the “using up to” menu (or 20 000 values if this is greater than 20 000). Figure 2.3 shows a typical result.

F igure 2.3

If the trace on which you have made the histogram is not a zoom, all bins with events will be displayed.

RESET

Otherwise, you can press to reset the trace and display all histogram events.
The Information Window (Item ➊) at the bottom of the previous figure shows a histogram of the freq
parameter for Channel 1 (designated as “A:Hfreq(1)”) for Trace A. The “1000 → 100 pts” in the window
indicates that the signal on Channel 1 has 1000 waveform acquisition samples per sweep and is being mapped
into 100 histogram bins.

222 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U RT E E N : M aking H istograms

SE TTIN G BIN N IN G AN D SCALE


The “Setup” menu allows modification of either the “Binning” or the histogram “Scale” settings. If “Binning”
is selected, the “classify into” menu appears, as shown in the figure above.
The number of bins used can be set from a range of 20 to 2000 in a 1-2-5 sequence, by pressing the
corresponding menu button or turning the associated knob.
If “Scale” is selected from the “Setup” menu, a screen similar to that of Figure 2.4 will be displayed.

F igure 2.4

The following options are offered by the “vertical” menu for setting the vertical scale:
Linear sets the vertical scale as linear. The baseline of the histogram designates a bin value of 0. As the
bin counts increase beyond that which can be displayed on screen using the current vertical scale, this scale
is automatically increased in a 1-2-5 sequence.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 223


H ISTOGRAMS

Log sets the vertical scale as logarithmic (Fig. 2.5). Because a value of ‘0’ cannot be specified
logarithmically, no baseline is provided.

F igure 2.5

224 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U RT E E N : M aking H istograms

LinConstMax sets the vertical scaling to a linear value that uses nearly the full vertical display capability of
the scope (Fig. 2.6). The height of the histogram will remain almost constant.

F igure 2.6

For any of these options, the scope automatically increases the vertical scale setting as required, ensuring the
highest histogram bin does not exceed the vertical screen display limit.
The “Center” and “Width” menus allow you to specify the histogram center value and width per division. The
width per division times the number of horizontal display divisions (10) determines the range of parameter
values centered on the number in the Center menu, used to create the histogram.
In the previous figure, the width per division is 2.000 × 103 (Item ➊). As the histogram is of a frequency
parameter, the measurement parameter is in hertz.
The range of parameter values contained in the histogram is thus ( 2 kHz/ division) x (10 divisions) = 20 kHz,
with a center of 2.02 E+ 05 Hz (➋).
In this example, all freq parameter values within 202 kHz ± 10 kHz — from 192 kHz to 212 kHz — are used
in creating the histogram. The range is subdivided by the number of bins set by the user. Here, the range is
20 kHz, as calculated above, and the number of bins is 100. Therefore, the range of each bin is:
20 kHz / 100 bins, or
0.2 kHz per bin.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 225


H ISTOGRAMS

The “Center” menu allows you to modify the center value’s mantissa — here 2.02 — exponent (E + 05), or the
number of digits used in specifying the mantissa (three). The display scale of 1 kHz/ division, shown in the
Trace Display Field, is indicated by ➌. This scale has been set using the horizontal zoom control and can
expand the scale for visual examination of the histogram trace.
The use of zoom in this way does not modify the range of data acquisition for the histogram, only the display
scale. The range of measurement acquisition for the histogram remains based on the center and width scale,
resulting in a range of 202 kHz ± 10 kHz for data acquisition.
The width or division can be incremented in a 1-2-5 sequence by selecting “Width.”

CHOOSIN G HISTOGRAM PARAME TE RS


Once you have created the histogram, you can select additional parameter values for measuring particular
attributes of the histogram itself.

6. Press the button to select and access the CHANGE PARAM menus (Fig. 2.7).

F igure 2.7

226 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U RT E E N : M aking H istograms

You can now select new parameters modify those already selected. In the figure on the previous page, the
histogram parameters maxp and mode (Item ➊) have been selected. These determine the count for the bin
with the highest peak, and the corresponding horizontal axis value of that bin’s center.
Note that both “maxp” and “mode” are followed by “(A)” on the display. This designates the measurements as
being made on the signal on Trace A. Also of note:
The value of “maxp(A)” is “110 # ”, indicating the highest bin has a count of 110 events.
The value of mode(A) is “203.90 kHz”, indicating that this bin is at 203.90 kHz.
The icon to the left of “mode” and “maxp” parameters indicates that the parameter is being made on a
trace defined as a histogram.
However, if these parameters were to be inadvertently set for a trace with no histogram they would show ‘---’.

USIN G ME ASURE ME N T CURSORS


You can use cursors (see Chapter 4) to select a section of a histogram on which a parameter is to be calculated.
Figure 2.8 below shows the average, “avg(A)” (Item ➊) of the distribution between the parameter cursors for a
histogram of the frequency (“freq”) parameter of a waveform. The parameter cursors (➋) are set “from” 4.70
divisions (➌) “to” 9.20 divisions (➍) of the display.

3
1
4

F igure 2.8

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 227


H ISTOGRAMS

N OTE : It is recommended that you use cursors only after the input waveform acquisition has been
completed. Otherwise, the cursors will also select the portion of the input waveform used to
calculate the parameter during acquisition, creating a histogram with only the local parameter
values for the selected waveform portion.

Cursors are useful for determining the value and population of selected bins. Figure 2.9 shows an absolute time
cursor (Item ➊) positioned on a selected histogram bin. The value of the bin (➋) and the population of the bin
(➌) are also shown.

F igure 2.9

A histogram’s range is represented by the horizontal CLEAR


SWEEPS
width of the histogram baseline. As the histogram is
repositioned vertically the left and right sides of the TIP: Press At any time to clear all
baseline can be seen. In the above figure, the left edge of histogram events in the 20-k parameter buffer
the range is visible (➍). at the same time.

228 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F O U RT E E N : M aking H istograms

ZOOMIN G SE GME N TE D TRACE S


You can also display histograms of traces that are zooms of segmented waveforms. When a segment from a
zoomed trace is selected, the histogram for that segment will appear. Only the portion of the segment
displayed and between the parameter cursors will be used in creating the histogram. The respective displayed
trace field will show the number of events captured for the segment.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 229


H ISTOGRAMS

BLANK PAGE

230 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F IF T E E N How Histograms Work

Theory of Operation
An understanding of statistical variations in parameter values is needed for many waveform parameter
measurements. Knowledge of the average, minimum, maximum, and standard deviation of the parameter may
often be enough, but in many cases you may need a more detailed understanding of the distribution of a
parameter’s values.
Histograms allow you to see how a parameter’s values are distributed over many measurements. They do this by
dividing a range of parameter values into sub-ranges called bins. Maintained for each bin is a count of the
number of parameter values — events — that fall within ranges of the bin itself.
While such a value range can be infinite, for practical purposes it need only be defined as large enough to
include any realistically possible parameter value. For example, in measuring TTL high-voltage values a range of
± 50 V is unnecessarily large, whereas one of 4 V ± 2.5 V is more reasonable. It is the 5 V range that is then
subdivided into bins. And if the number of bins used were 50, each would have a range of 5 V/ 50 bins or
0.1 V/ bin. Events falling into the first bin would then be between 1.5 V and 1.6 V. While the next bin would
capture all events between 1.6 V and 1.7 V, and so on.
After a process of several thousand events, the bar graph of the count for each bin — its histogram —
provides a good understanding of the distribution of values. Histograms generally use the ‘x’ axis to show a
bin’s sub-range value, and the ‘y’ axis for the count of parameter values within each bin. The leftmost bin with
a non-zero count shows the lowest parameter value measurement(s). The vertically highest bin shows the
greatest number of events falling within its sub-range.
The number of events in a bin, peak or a histogram is referred to as its population. F igure 4.1 shows a
histogram’s highest population bin as the one with a sub-range of 4.3 to 4.4 V (which is to be expected of a
TTL signal).

Count
40

30

20

10

1.5 3.15 Volts


2 3 4 4.35 5 6
Range

F igure 4.1

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 231


H ISTOGRAMS

The lowest-value bin with events is that with a sub-range of 3.0 to 3.1 V. As TTL high voltages need to be
greater than 2.5 V, the lowest bin is within the allowable tolerance. However, because of its proximity to this
tolerance and the degree of the bin’s separation from all other values, additional investigation may be required.

DSO PROCE SS
The Waverunner-2 digital storage oscilloscope (DSO) with WAVA generates histograms of the parameter
values of input waveforms. But first, you must define the following:
1. The parameter to be histogrammed
2. The trace on which the histogram is to be displayed
3. The maximum number of parameter measurement values to be used in creating the histogram
4. The measurement range of the histogram
5. The number of bins to be used

Once these are defined, the oscilloscope is ready to make the histogram. The sequence for acquiring histogram
data is as follows:
1. Trigger
2. Waveform acquisition
3. Parameter calculation(s)
4. Histogram update
5. Trigger re-arm.
If you set the timebase for non-segmented mode, a single acquisition occurs prior to parameter calculations.
However, in Sequence mode an acquisition for each segment occurs prior to parameter calculations. If the
source of histogram data is a memory, saving new data to memory effectively acts as a trigger and acquisition.
Because updating the screen can take much processing time, it occurs only once a second, minimizing trigger
dead time. Under remote control the display can be turned off to maximize measurement speed.

PARAME TE R BUFFE R
The oscilloscope maintains a circular parameter buffer of the last 20 000 measurements made, including values
that fall outside the set histogram range. If the maximum number of events to be used for the histogram is a
number ‘N’ less than 20 000, the histogram will be continuously updated with the last ‘N’ events as new
acquisitions occur. If the maximum number is greater than 20 000, the histogram will be updated until the
number of events is equal to ‘N.’ Then, if the number of bins or the histogram range is modified, the scope
will use the parameter buffer values to redraw the histogram with either the last ‘N’ or 20 000 values acquired
— whichever is the lesser. The parameter buffer thereby allows histograms to be redisplayed, using an acquired
set of values and settings that produce a distribution shape with the most useful information.

232 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F IF T E E N : H ow H istograms Work

In many cases the optimal range is not readily apparent. So the scope has a powerful range finding function. If
required it will examine the values in the parameter buffer to calculate an optimal range and redisplay the
histogram using it. The Waverunner-2 will also give a running count of the number of parameter values that
fall within, below, or above the range. If any values fall below or above the range, the range finder can then
recalculate to include these parameter values, as long as they are still within the buffer.

CAPTURE OF PARAME TE R E VE N TS
The number of events captured per waveform acquisition or display sweep depends on the parameter type.
Acquisitions are initiated by the occurrence of a trigger event. Sweeps are equivalent to the waveform captured
and displayed on an input channel (1, 2, or 3 or 4). For non-segmented waveforms an acquisition is identical to
a sweep. Whereas for segmented waveforms an acquisition occurs for each segment and a sweep is equivalent
to acquisitions for all segments. Only the section of a waveform between the parameter cursors is used in the
calculation of parameter values and corresponding histogram events.
The following table provides a summary of the number of histogram events captured per acquisition or sweep
for each parameter, and for a waveform section between the parameter cursors.

PAR AM E T E R S
N U M B E R OF E V E N T S CAPT U R E D
(P L U S OT H E RS, DE P E N DI N G ON OPT IO N S)

data All data values in the region analyzed.


duty, freq, period, width, Up to 49 events per acquisition.
ampl, area, base, cmean, cmedian, crms, csdev, cycles,
delay, dur, first, last, maximum, mean, median,
minimum, nbph, nbpw, over+, over–, phase, pkpk, One event per acquisition.
points, rms, sdev, ∆dly, ∆t@ lv
f@ level, f80–20%, fall, r@ level, r20–80%, rise Up to 49 events per acquisition.

HISTOGRAM PARAME TE RS
Once a histogram is defined and generated, measurements can be performed on the histogram itself. Typical of
these are the histogram’s
average value, standard deviation
most common value (parameter value of highest count bin)
leftmost bin position (representing the lowest measured waveform parameter value)
rightmost bin (representing the highest measured waveform parameter value)

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 233


H ISTOGRAMS

Histogram parameters are provided to enable these measurements. Available through selecting “Statistics” from
the “Category” menu, they are calculated for the selected section between the parameter cursors (for a full
description of each parameter, see Chapter 4):

avg average of data values in histogram


fwhm full width (of largest peak) at half the maximum bin
fwxx full width (of largest peak) at xx% the maximum bin
hampl histogram amplitude between two largest peaks
hbase histogram base or leftmost of two largest peaks
high highest data value in histogram
hmedian median data value of histogram
hrms rms value of data in histogram
htop histogram top or rightmost of two largest peaks
low lowest data value in histogram
maxp population of most populated bin in histogram
mode data value of most populated bin in histogram
pctl data value in histogram for which specified ‘x’% of population is smaller
pks number of peaks in histogram
range difference between highest and lowest data values
sigma standard deviation of the data values in histogram
totp total population in histogram
xapk x-axis position of specified largest peak

ZOOM TRACE S AN D SE GME N TE D WAVE FORMS


Histograms of zoom traces display all events for the displayed portion of a waveform between the parameter
cursors. When dealing with segmented waveforms, and when a single segment is selected, the histogram will be
recalculated for all events in the displayed portion of this segment between the parameter cursors. But if “All
Segments” is selected, the histogram for all segments will be displayed.

HISTOGRAM PE AKS
Because the shape of histogram distributions is particularly interesting, additional parameter measurements are
available for analyzing these distributions. They are generally centered around one of several peak value bins,
known, with its associated bins, as a histogram peak.

234 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R F IF T E E N : H ow H istograms Work

E xample: In Figure 4.2, a histogram of the voltage value of a five-volt amplitude square wave is centered
around two peak value bins: 0 V and 5 V. The adjacent bins signify variation due to noise. The graph of the
centered bins shows both as peaks.

Volts
0 5

F igure 4.2

Determining such peaks is very useful because they indicate dominant values of a signal.
However, signal noise and the use of a high number of bins relative to the number of parameter values
acquired, can give a jagged and spiky histogram, making meaningful peaks hard to distinguish. The scope
analyzes histogram data to identify peaks from background noise and histogram definition artifacts such as
small gaps, which are due to very narrow bins.
For a detailed description on how the scope determines peaks see the pks parameter description in Chapter 4.

BIN N IN G AN D ME ASURE ME N T ACCURACY


Histogram bins represent a sub-range of waveform parameter values, or events. The events represented by a
bin may have a value anywhere within its sub-range. However, parameter measurements of the histogram itself,
such as average, assume that all events in a bin have a single value. The scope uses the center value of each bin’s
sub-range in all its calculations. The greater the number of bins used to subdivide a histogram’s range, the less
the potential deviation between actual event values and those values assumed in histogram parameter
calculations.
Nevertheless, using more bins may require that you perform a greater number of waveform parameter
measurements, in order to populate the bins sufficiently for the identification of a characteristic histogram
distribution.
In addition, very fine grained binning will result in gaps between populated bins that may make it difficult to
determine peaks.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 235


H ISTOGRAMS

The oscilloscope’s 20 000-parameter buffer is very effective for determining the optimal number of bins to be
used. An optimal bin number is one where the change in parameter values is insignificant, and the histogram
distribution does not have a jagged appearance. With this buffer, a histogram can be dynamically redisplayed as
the number of bins is modified by the user. In addition, depending on the number of bins selected, the change
in waveform parameter values can be seen.

236 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N Histogram Parameters

avg Average
Definition: Average or mean value of data in a histogram.
Description: The average is calculated by the formula: Avg =
n n

∑ (bin count) (bin value) / ∑ (bin count)


i =1
i i
i =1
i ,

where n is the number of bins in the histogram, bin count is the count or height of a
bin, and bin value is the center value of the range of parameter values a bin can
represent.

E xample:: Count# 3.5

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0
4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Value (volts)
The average value of this histogram is: ( 4.1 * 2 + 4.3 * 3 + 4.4 * 1) / 6 = 4.25.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 237


H ISTOGRAMS

fwhm Full Width at Half Maximum


Definition: Determines the width of the largest area peak, measured between bins on either side
of the highest bin in the peak that have a population of half the highest’s population.
If several peaks have an area equal to the maximum population, the leftmost peak is
used in the computation.
Description: First, the highest population peak is identified and the height of its highest bin
(population) determined (for a discussion on how peaks are determined see the pks
parameter Description:). Next, the populations of bins to the right and left are
found, until a bin on each side is found to have a population of less than 50% of that
of the highest bin’s. A line is calculated on each side, from the center point of the
first bin below the 50% population to that of the adjacent bin, towards the highest
bin. The intersection points of these lines with the 50% height value is then
determined. The length of a line connecting the intersection points is the value for
fwhm.

E xample:

12
maximum

10

8
7
6
50% maximum 5
4
3 3
2
1

fwhm

238 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

fwxx Full Width at xx% Maximum


Definition: Determines the width of the largest area peak, measured between bins on either side
of the highest bin in the peak that have a population of xx% of the highest’s
population. If several peaks have an area equal to the maximum population, the
leftmost peak is used in the computation.
Description: First, the highest population peak is identified and the height of its highest bin
(population) determined (see the pks Description:). Next, the bin populations to the
right and left are found until a bin on each side is found to have a population of less
than xx% of that of the highest bin. A line is calculated on each side, from the center
point of the first bin below the 50% population to that of the adjacent bin, towards
the highest bin. The intersection points of these lines with the xx% height value is
then determined. The length of a line connecting the intersection points is the value
for fwxx.
Parameter Settings: Selection of the fwxx parameter in the “CHANGE PARAM” menu group causes
the “MORE fwxx SETUP” menu to appear. Pressing the corresponding menu
button displays a threshold setting menu that enables you to set the ‘xx’ value to
between 0 and 100% of the peak.

E xample: fwxx with threshold set to 35%:

12
maximum

10

8
7
6
5
4
3 35% maximum 3
2
1

fwhm

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 239


H ISTOGRAMS

hampl Histogram Amplitude


Definition: The difference in value of the two most populated peaks in a histogram. This
parameter is useful for waveforms with two primary parameter values, such as TTL
voltages, where hampl would indicate the difference between the binary ‘1’ and ‘0’
voltage values.
Description: The values at the center (line dividing the population of peak in half) of the two
highest peaks are determined (see pks parameter description:). The value of the
leftmost of the two peaks is the histogram base (see hbase). While that of the
rightmost is the histogram top (see htop). The parameter is then calculated as:
hampl = htop − hbase

E xample:

peak #1

peak #2

150 152
hampl
base top
In this histogram, hampl is 152 mV − 150 mV = 2 mV.

240 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

Hbase Histogram Base


Definition: The value of the leftmost of the two most populated peaks in a histogram. This
parameter is primarily useful for waveforms with two primary parameter values such
as TTL voltages where hbase would indicate the binary ‘0’ voltage value.
Description: The two highest histogram peaks are determined. If several peaks are of equal height
the leftmost peak among these is used (see pks). Then the leftmost of the two
identified peaks is selected. This peak’s center value (the line that divides the
population of the peak in half) is the hbase.

E xample:

peak #1

peak #2

150
hbase

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 241


H ISTOGRAMS

high High
Definition: The value of the rightmost populated bin in a histogram.
Description: The rightmost of all populated histogram bins is determined: high is its center value,
the highest parameter value shown in the histogram.

E xample: count

152 mV
high
In this histogram high is 152 mV.

242 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

hmedian Histogram Median


Definition: The value of the ‘x’ axis of a histogram, dividing the histogram population into two
equal halves.
Description: The total population of the histogram is determined. Scanning from left to right, the
population of each bin is summed until a bin that causes the sum to equal or exceed
half the population value is encountered. The proportion of the population of the
bin needed for a sum of half the total population is then determined. Using this
proportion, the horizontal value of the bin at the same proportion of its range is
found, and returned as hmedian.

E xample: The total population of a histogram is 100 and the histogram range is divided into 20
bins. The population sum, from left to right, is 48 at the eighth bin. The population
of the ninth bin is 8 and its sub-range is from 6.1 to 6.5 V. The ratio of counts
needed for half- to total-bin population is:
2 counts needed / 8 counts = .25
The value for hmedian is:
6.1 volts + .25 * (6.5 – 6.1) volts = 6.2 volts

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 243


H ISTOGRAMS

hrms Histogram Root Mean Square


Definition: The rms value of the values in a histogram.
Description: The center value of each populated bin is squared and multiplied by the population
(height) of the bin. All results are summed and the total is divided by the population
of all the bins. The square root of the result is returned as hrms.

E xample: Using the histogram shown here, the value for hrms is:

hrms = (3.52 * 2 + 2.52 * 4)/6 = 2.87

ount

2.5 3.5 value

244 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

htop Histogram Top


Definition: The value of the rightmost of the two most populated peaks in a histogram. This
parameter is useful for waveforms with two primary parameter values, such as TTL
voltages, where htop would indicate the binary ‘1’ voltage value.
Description: The two highest histogram peaks are determined. The rightmost of the two
identified peaks is then selected. The center of that peak is htop (center is the
horizontal point where the population to the left is equal to the area to the right).

E xample:

peak #1

peak #2

152 mV
htop

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 245


H ISTOGRAMS

low Low
Definition: The value of the leftmost populated bin in a histogram population. It indicates the
lowest parameter value in a histogram’s population.
Description: The leftmost of all populated histogram bins is determined. The center value of that
bin is low.

E xample: count

140 150 152 mV


Low

In this histogram low is 140 mV.

246 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

maxp Maximum Population


Definition: The count (vertical value) of the highest population bin in a histogram.
Description: Each bin between the parameter cursors is examined for its count. The highest
count is returned as maxp.

E xample:

maxp

Here, maxp is 14.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 247


H ISTOGRAMS

mode Mode
Definition: The value of the highest population bin in a histogram.
Description: Each bin between the parameter cursors is examined for its population count. The
leftmost bin with the highest count found is selected. Its center value is returned as
mode.

E xample: count

150 mV
mode
Here, mode is 150 mV.

248 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

pctl Percentile
Definition: Computes the horizontal data value that separates the data in a histogram such that
the population on the left is a specified percentage ‘xx’ of the total population. When
the threshold is set to 50%, pctl is the same as hmedian.
Description: The total population of the histogram is determined. Scanning from left to right, the
population of each bin is summed until a bin that causes the sum to equal or exceed
‘xx’% of the population value is encountered. A ratio of the number of counts
needed for ‘xx’% population/ total bin population is then determined for the bin.
The horizontal value of the bin at that ratio point of its range is found, and returned
as pctl.
E xample: The total population of a histogram is 100. The histogram range is divided into 20
bins and ‘xx’ is set to 25%. The population sum at the sixth bin from the left is 22.
The population of the seventh is 9 and its sub-range is 6.1 to 6.4 V. The ratio of
counts needed for 25% population to total bin population is:
3 counts needed / 9 counts = 1/ 3.
The value for pctl is:
6.1 volts + .33 * (6.4 − 6.1) volts = 6.2 volts.
Parameter Settings: Selection of the pctl parameter in the “CHANGE PARAM” menu group causes the
“MORE pctl SETUP” menu to appear. Pressing the corresponding menu button
displays a threshold setting menu. With the associated knob you can set the
percentage value to between 1% and 100% of the total population.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 249


H ISTOGRAMS

pks Peaks
Definition: The number of peaks in a histogram.
Description: The instrument analyzes histogram data to identify peaks from background noise
and histogram binning artifacts such as small gaps.
Peak identification is a 3-step process:
1. The mean height of the histogram is calculated for all populated bins. A
threshold (T1) is calculated from this mean where:

T1= mean + 2 sqrt (mean).

2. A second threshold is determined based on all populated bins under T1 in


height, where:

T2 = mean + 2 * sigma,

and where sigma is the standard deviation of all populated bins under T1.
3. Once T2 is defined, the histogram distribution is scanned from left to right. Any
bin that crosses above T2 signifies the existence of a peak. Scanning continues
to the right until one bin or more crosses below T2. However, if the bin(s) cross
below T2 for less than a hundredth of the histogram range, they are ignored,
and scanning continues in search of a peak(s) that crosses under T2 for more
than a hundredth of the histogram range. Scanning goes on over the remainder
of the range to identify additional peaks. Additional peaks within a fiftieth of
the range of the populated part of a bin from a previous peak are ignored.

N OTE : If the number of bins is set too high a histogram may have many
small gaps. This increases sigma and thereby T2, and in extreme cases can
prevent determination of a peak, even if one appears to be present to the eye.

250 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

E xample: Here the two peaks have been identified. The peak with the highest population is
peak # 1.

T2

peak #1 peak #2

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 251


H ISTOGRAMS

range Range
Definition: Computes the difference between the value of the rightmost and that of the leftmost
populated bin.
Description: The rightmost and leftmost populated bins are identified. The difference in value
between the two is returned as the range.
E xample:

count

150 152
range mV

In this example: range is 2 mV

252 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

sigma Sigma
Definition: The standard deviation of the data in a histogram.
Description: sigma is calculated by the formulas:
n n
mean = ∑ [bin counti * bin valuei]/(∑ bin counti) ;
i =1 i =1

n n
sigma =
∑ [bin count * (bin value − mean) ]/(∑ [bin count ] − 1) ,
i =1
i i
2

i =1
i

where n is the number of bins in the histogram, bin count is the count or height of a
bin, and bin value is the center value of the range of parameter values a bin can
represent.

E xample: For the histogram:

Count# 3.5

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0
4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Value (volts)

mean = ( 2 * 4.1 + 3* 4.3 + 1 * 4.4) / 6 = 4.25

sigma = (2*(4.1 - 4.25)2 + 3*(4.3 - 4.25)2 + 1*(4.4 - 4.25)2 ) / (6-1) = 0.1225

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 253


H ISTOGRAMS

totp Total Population


Definition: Calculates the total population of a histogram between the parameter cursors.
Description: The count for all populated bins between the parameter cursors is summed.

E xample:
5
Count
4

The total population of this histogram is 9.

254 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SI XT E E N : H istogram Parameters

xapk X Coordinate of xx’th Peak


Definition: Returns the value of the xx’th peak that is the largest by area in a histogram.
Description: First the peaks in a histogram are determined and ranked in order of total area (for a
discussion on how peaks are identified see the Description: for the pks parameter).
The center of the nth ranked peak (the point where the area to the left is equal to the
area to the right), where n is selected by you, is then returned as xapk.

E xample: The rightmost peak is the largest, and is thus ranked first in area (1). The leftmost
peak, although higher, is ranked second in area (2). The lowest peak is also the
smallest in area (3).

Largest-area
peak

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 255


H ISTOGRAMS

BLANK PAGE

256 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


P AR T F O U R

E T HE RN E T
OPT ION

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 257


C H APT E R SE VE N T E E N : Overview
In this chapter, see how

Implementation Standards

Connections

ScopeE xplorer

ActiveDSO

258 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SE VE N T E E N Overview

Introduction
The 10BaseT Ethernet option allows you to control the LeCroy Waverunner-2 over a network, or through a
direct connection between the oscilloscope and a computer. The connection is made through the E thernet port
located at the rear of the oscilloscope.
This chapter introduces the basic capabilities for control of the Waverunner-2 oscilloscope over the Ethernet
interface.
The Waverunner Remote Control Manual gives a complete description of the GPIB commands. These
commands apply to control of the oscilloscope via Ethernet, as well as through the GPIB interface.

IMPLE ME N TATION STAN DARD


To the greatest extent possible, these remote commands conform to the IEE E 488.21 standard, which may be
considered as an extension of the IE E E 488.1 standard, dealing mainly with electrical and mechanical issues.

CON N E CTION S
The oscilloscope can be connected to the PC via Ethernet using a TCP/ IP network protocol. This connection
can be made through a network, or directly between the oscilloscope’s E thernet interface and a computer using
a crossover network cable.

1
ANSI/IEEE Std. 488.2–1987, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols, and Common Commands. The Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc., 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017, USA.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 259


E THE RN E T OPTION

SCOPE E XPLORE R
ScopeE xplorer is a free PC-based connectivity tool that interfaces a LeCroy Digital Oscilloscope to the
Windows 95/ 98 or Windows NT/ 2000 desktop. It is available on CD-ROM as well as from the internet at
www.lecroy.com.
ScopeE xplorer provides the following connectivity features:
Remote control terminal
This provides a teletype-like terminal that allows standard remote control commands to be sent to the scope,
and the scope’s response to be displayed. Features are provided to allow sequences of commands to be piped
to the scope from a file, and the scope’s responses to be piped into another file.
Image capture and storage
This feature allows a pixel-for-pixel copy of the scope’s display to be transferred to the PC, and displayed
and/ or printed. A single key press (or button push) will transfer this image to the Windows Clipboard ready for
pasting into any Windows application. It also supports automatic refresh of the captured image at periodic
intervals.
Panel file (scope setup) capture, storage, and playback
The entire front panel setup of the scope can be captured with this feature and stored on the PC with a long
descriptive filename. The captured panel can then be transferred back to the scope at a later date to reproduce
the setup.
Trace capture, storage, playback, and conversion to ASCII
Waveforms acquired by the Waverunner-2 can be transferred to the PC and stored in either the compact
LeCroy Binary format, or an ASCII version that allows compatibility with PC-based analysis products, such as
Microsoft’s Excel or Mathsoft’s MathCad. Pre-captured LeCroy Binary waveforms can be converted into
ASCII files individually or in batches.
Virtual Front Panel
The Waverunner-2 can be controlled remotely using the virtual front panel feature. A virtual panel with front
panel knobs and buttons is presented on the Windows display, and may be used to control the scope. (N ote:
The virtual front panel may not reflect exactly the front panel of the Waverunner-2, but is still useful for
control.)

260 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SE VE N T E E N O verview

ACTIVE DSO
This ActiveX TM control enables LeCroy oscilloscopes to be controlled by, and to exchange data with, a variety
of Windows applications that support the ActiveX standard. MS Office programs, Internet Explorer, Visual
Basic, Visual C+ + , Visual Java, and MATLAB (v5.3) are a few of the many applications that support ActiveX
controls. ActiveDSO is available on CD-ROM or on the internet at www.lecroy.com.
With ActiveDSO you can develop your test program using standard GPIB commands. For easy integration of
your scope data with your Windows Application (through GPIB, RS-232, or Ethernet 10BaseT) ActiveDSO,
helps you:
Generate a report by importing scope data right into E xcel or Word.
Archive measurement results on the fly in a Microsoft Access Database.
Automate tests using Visual Basic, Java, C+ + , E xcel (VBA).
The ActiveDSO control hides the intricacies of programming and provides a simple and consistent interface to
the controlling application. With less than 10 lines of VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code in an Excel
macro the spreadsheet can recover pre-scaled waveform data from a remote instrument.
The ActiveDSO control can also be embedded visually in any OLE automation compatible client, and can be
used manually without any need for programming. It will run on any PC running Windows 95, Windows 98, or
Windows NT.
There are two fundamental ways to use the control:
As a visible object embedded in an OLE Automation compatible Client (PowerPoint for example)
showing a captured display image. See Embedded Control Example for more details.
As an invisible object accessed via a scripting language (Visual Basic for Applications, for example) to
remotely control an instrument. See Accessing from VBA for more details.
VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) is the programming language built into many of the more recent Windows
applications. It is a subset of Visual Basic that makes it very simple to utilize the services of OLE Automation
Servers and ActiveX Controls.
The following VBA subroutine demonstrates how easy it is to connect to a Waverunner-2 Oscilloscope and
send remote commands to it.
Sub LeCroyDSOTest()
Dim o As Object
Set o = CreateObject("LeCroy.ActiveDSOCtrl.1")
Call o.AboutBox ' Present the control's About box
Call o.MakeConnection("IP: 172.28.11.26) 'Connect to device on LAN
Call o.WriteString("BUZZ BEEP", True) ' Make the DSO beep
End Sub

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 261


E THE RN E T OPTION

E XAMPLE SYN TAX


Boolean controlName.WriteString
The WriteString method has the following arguments.

Argument Description
controlname The name of the ActiveDSO control object.
textString String, Text string to send to the device.
EOI Boolean, TRUE = terminate with EOI
Returns: True on success, False on failure.
Remarks: This method sends a string command to the instrument.
If EOI is set to TRUE then the device will start to interpret the command immediately. This is normally the
desired behavior.
If EOI is set to FALSE then a command may be sent in several parts with the device starting to interpret the
command only when it receives the final part which should have EOI set TRUE.

262 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R SE VE N T E E N O verview

BLANK PAGE

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 263


C H APT E R E IGH T E E N : Connecting to PC or Network
In this chapter, see how

To configure the Waverunner-2 to communicate with a PC connected to the


network

To configure a PC that is not connected to the network

To make physical connections

To verify your connection

To change an IP address

264 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T E E N Connecting to PC orNetwork

Connecting the Waverunner-2 to its Host


This chapter describes connecting the Waverunner-2 oscilloscope to the host PC or network over the standard
10BaseT Ethernet. Windows NT and Windows 95 operating systems are supported.

SCOPE RE AR PAN E L

The LAN connector is shown in the following illustration.

LAN10BT

• Supports IE E E 802.3 Ethernet standards


• Supports 10BASE-T
• Status LEDs:
LN K shows the status of the link integrity
ACT shows receive or transmit activity
• Adapted to Waverunner-2’s small peripherals connector

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 265


E THE RN E T OPTION

PC RE QUIRE ME N TS
Pentium Class PC
32 MB RAM
10 MB free disk space
Windows 95 or Windows NT
Ethernet Adapter supporting 10BaseT, with a standard RJ45 connection

E THE RN E T CON N E CTION

The Waverunner-2 oscilloscope operates over a standard 10BaseT Ethernet connection. The instrument can be
plugged into a network or operated from a direct connection to a host computer. A different type of cable is
required for each of these connections. For a direct connection to the PC, a crossover cable is required, whereas
the network connection is made using a straight cable.
The Waverunner-2 oscilloscope has an IP address assigned to it at the factory: it does not support Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or any other automatic address resolution scheme. You may change this IP
address to accommodate your network setting.
The factory-assigned IP address is: 172.25.1.2
The factory-assigned Mask is: 255.255.0.0
The factory-assigned Gateway is: 172.25.0.1

266 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T E E N Connecting to PC orNetwork

CON FIGURIN G WAVE RUN N E R-2 TO COMMUN ICATE WITH A PC CON N E CTE D TO THE
N E TWORK
If your computer is already configured, obtain the following settings for the Waverunner-2 from your network
administrator:
IP address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
1. Press the U TIL ITY button on the oscilloscope’s front panel.

2. Press the soft key to select Remote Setup from “Utilities.”

3. Select N etwork Setup; “TCP/ IP Network Setup” is


displayed. Verify or modify the Ethernet settings via the
oscilloscope’s front panel controls.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 267


E THE RN E T OPTION

CON FIGURIN G A PC THAT IS N OT CON N E CTE D TO THE N E TWORK


Before establishing a direct connection between the oscilloscope and the
Note: The following host computer, the PC must first be properly configured. A specific
examples assume that the TCP/ IP address must be assigned — known as "static addressing." But
host PC operates from this means that the PC cannot be set up to obtain its IP address from a
Windows™ 95. The DHCP server. To set the host PC’s static address with Windows 95:
connection procedure for 1. Select St ar t → Set t ings → C ont r ol Panel.
Windows N T is similar.
2. Double-click the Network icon in the Control Panel. A network
dialog box similar to this one appears:

268 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T E E N Connecting to PC orNetwork

3. If the TCP/ IP protocol is not listed, you will have to add it. Follow your operating system user guide to
add the TCP/ IP protocol and bind it to the Ethernet adapter.

4. Double-click the line. A dialog box similar to the one below appears. Select

5. If this has already been selected, the computer’s static address is set and nothing more needs to be done.
Cancel out of the TCP/ IP and network dialog boxes, and close the control panel.
6. If the address has not already been selected, fill in the IP address and subnet mask as shown above. The
subnet mask for 172.25.x.x is 255.255.0.0. If the computer will not be plugged into a network, the above

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 269


E THE RN E T OPTION

address (or almost any address within the chosen subnet) will do. The only address that will not work is the
same one as that of the oscilloscope to be controlled.

7. Now click in the TCP/ IP Properties dialog box. Depending on the operating system and
version, you may need to reboot the computer. If so, a dialog box should alert you to this.

MAKIN G PHYSICAL CON N E CTION


To make the physical connection between the oscilloscope and the host computer:
1. Connect the oscilloscope to the PC using a crossover cable (for direct connection).
2. Power the oscilloscope unit on.

VE RIFYIN G CON N E CTION


The physical connection and the PC’s TCP/ IP configuration can be
Note: If your PC does not verified using the “ping” command, available on both Windows™ 95 and
have TCIP/ IP, see the Windows™ NT with TCP/ IP network protocol installed. In order to
dedicated Windows™ 95 or check the network connection between the PC and the oscilloscope:
N T User’s Manuals for 3. Start MS-DOS Prompt
installation instructions.
4. Type ping < ip_address> , where < ip_address> is the static address
assigned to the oscilloscope. The dialog box on the next page
illustrates the result of a successful “ping”, with the Ethernet
connection shown established. The IP address of the oscilloscope in
this case is 172.25.1.2, the factory default address.

270 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T E E N Connecting to PC orNetwork

The ping command has sent a message to the instrument and waited for a response. If a timeout
occurs, as is shown in the box on the next page, the IP address used for the destination (the
oscilloscope) is incorrect or not within the subnet mask of the PC’s IP address.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 271


E THE RN E T OPTION

N E TWORK CON N E CTION


Check with your network administrator before connecting the oscilloscope to a network. Incorrect addresses
on a network can cause both the network and the oscilloscope to behave strangely. However, a network
connection ought to be as simple as plugging the oscilloscope into the network. Proper connectioncanbe verified by
followingthe verificationinstructions inthe previous section.
If you are concerned mainly with system throughput, network connection is not recommended
because the network traffic will slow down the oscilloscope’s data transfer rate.
Note: The default Gateway is assigned as "172.25.0.1". Unless your network has this Gateway available, you
must ensure the computer and the oscilloscope are on the same subnet.

272 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R E IGH T E E N Connecting to PC orNetwork

CHAN GIN G IP ADDRE SS


Once the IP address is changed, the unit will no longer respond to the original address.
If the network settings are unknown or accidentally set to invalid values, they can be recovered by following the
procedure above.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 273


C H APT E R N IN E T E E N : Software Tools
In this chapter, learn about

ActiveDSO

ScopeE xplorer

274 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E T E E N Software Tools

Introductionto Software Tools


The Waverunner-2 software tools allow you to develop your own application specific programs quickly
and easily. These tools are ActiveDSO™ and ScopeE xplorer™ . The files for all software described
here are to be found on the CD-ROM.
ActiveDSO
Based on Microsoft’s ActiveX control technology, A ctiveDSO gives leverage to widely available Microsoft
software tools, and makes programming within the Microsoft environment easier. A ctiveDSO simplifies the
computer’s interface with the Waverunner-2 and programming within Visual C+ + , Visual Basic, or any other
ActiveX compatible applications. For example, Microsoft Excel can even be used to control and retrieve data
directly from the Waverunner-2. This tool becomes part of the target application and provides seamless access
to the full power of the Waverunner-2.
ScopeE xplorer
This PC-based connectivity tool integrates LeCroy instruments with Windows 95 or Windows NT PCs.
Connected to the PC through the Ethernet port and using ScopeE xplorer, the Waverunner-2 stores data and
images in the computer. Because it is designed specifically for use with LeCroy instruments, ScopeE xplorer allows
these tasks to be completed with only a few keystrokes or mouse clicks.

USIN G ActiveDSO
ActiveDSO is highly suitable for fast program development in the Microsoft environment. This
program is a control of ActiveX, the software technology developed by Microsoft as a subset of its
COM model.
A ctiveDSO facilitates programming with the Waverunner-2 by providing a ready interface between the
instrument and the host computer. Programs such as Visual C+ + , Visual Basic, or Visual Basic for
Applications (VBA) can be used under remote control without concern for interfacing complications.
A ctiveDSO acts as the key design structure allowing effective integration of software from the different
manufacturers supporting ActiveX containment.

Control Instantiation
This ActiveX component can be instantiated more than once by using the Visual Basic function CreateObject.
Once the object is created, invoking the connection method will initialize it. ActiveDSO enables control of the
Waverunner-2 from a variety of PC desktop applications. The complexities of programming with Ethernet are
fully encapsulated in this control. For example, with less than 10 lines of VBA code in an E xcel macro the
spreadsheet can recover pre-scaled waveform data from the Waverunner-2 (see the on-line Excel example in
ActiveDSO).

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 275


E THE RN E T OPTION

ActiveDSO control can be used in two fundamental ways:


1. As a visible object embedded in an OLE automation compatible client (PowerPoint, for example) showing
a captured Waverunner-2 display image. See the Embedded Control example below for more details.
2. As an invisible object accessed through a scripting language (VBA, for example) to remotely control the
Waverunner-2. See VBA example below for more details.
The A ctiveDSO control may be embedded in any ActiveX containment-capable client, and may be used
manually without need of any programming or scripting.
Example: PowerPoint
This example shows the control being embedded in a Microsoft
Note: This example PowerPoint slide. The waveform captured by the Waverunner-2 can be
assumes that PowerPoint 97 easily imported into PowerPoint with just a few mouse clicks:
is being used. E arlier versions
may not behave in the same 1. Ensure that the A ctiveDSO files from the CD-ROM are installed on
manner. the PC.
2. Verify that the PC and Waverunner-2 are properly connected to the
Ethernet.
3. Open a new blank presentation in PowerPoint.
4. Select “Insert,” then Object, as shown here:

276 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E T E E N Software T ools

5. From the pop-up window, select LeCroy ActiveDSO object as shown here:

6. Right-click the object and select “Make Connection.”

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 277


E THE RN E T OPTION

7. Select “NetworkTCP/IP connection” as shown here (“scope” = Waverunner):

8. Enter the Waverunner-2’s IP address and click “OK.”

278 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E T E E N Software T ools

9. Right-click the object again and select the Refresh Image menu item. A captured waveform will be
displayed similar to the one shown here:

Waverunner-2’s captured waveform imported into PowerPoint.


Once the A ctiveDSO object has been properly set within the application, a macro script can be created utilizing
an object method such as WriteString() to send DISP ON, C1:TRA ON, TRMD AUTO (see the Remote
Control Manual). Then RefreshImage() method can be used to update the screen.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 279


E THE RN E T OPTION

E xample: VBA
VBA is the programming language built in to many of the more recent Windows applications. It is a subset of
Visual Basic that makes using OLE Automation Servers and ActiveX Controls very simple. The following VBA
subroutine demonstrates how easy it is to connect to an Waverunner and send remote commands to it.
_______________________________________________________
Sub LeCroyDSOTest()
Dim dso As Object

Set dso = CreateObject("LeCroy.ActiveDSO.1")

Call dso.AboutBox Present the control's About box


Call dso.MakeConnection("IP:172.25.1.2") Connect to the unit
Call dso.WriteString("DISP ON", 1) Enable the internal display routine
Call dso.WriteString("TRMD AUTO", 1) Set the trigger mode to AUTO
End Sub
_____________________________________________________

To enter the VBA editor in members of the Microsoft Office suite:


1. Select Tools → Macro → Visual Basic Editor menu item.
Note: For more information,
see the ActiveDSO on-line 2. When the VBA window appears, select the Insert → Module menu
Help. On-line Help contains item.
Visual C+ + example,
explanations of ActiveDSO 3. Copy the above example into the editor window that appears.
Methods and Properties.
To execute:
4. Position the text cursor within the subroutine.
5. Either select the Run → Run Sub/ UserForm or press function key F5.

280 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


C H APT E R N IN E T E E N Software T ools

USIN G ScopeE xplorer


1. Start ScopeE xplorer.
2. Click on Scope → Scope Finder.
3. In the “Scope Selector” window, click “OK,” as shown below.
4. When the ADD DE VICE window opens, select "Network."
(If you don’t see a “Network” button, press “ALT + N” simultaneously.)
5. A “Network Device” window will appear, as shown here:

6. Enter the IP address of the Waverunner-2 in the “NETWORK DE VICE” window.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 281


E THE RN E T OPTION

ScopeExplorer features:
Terminal – Remote control commands can be sent and data can
be retrieved using Terminal.
Image capture – Internal scope-like “screen” representation of
the acquired waveform can be viewed with the Display button.
Use the Refresh button to refresh the “screen” dump image.
IP address change – ScopeE xplorer can be used to change the
IP address of the Waverunner-2. See Chapter 2 for details.
ScopeE xplorer is supported for all LeCroy instruments. Additional
information can found on the LeCroy web site: www.lecroy.com

282 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


APPE N DIX Architecture and Specifications

Specifications
N OTE : Specifications are subject to
MODE LS
change without notice.
Waverunner-2 LT372/ LT262 Series: Two channels
Waverunner-2 LT374 / LT264 Series: Four channels

Waverunner-2 LT354/ LT584 Series: Four channels

ACQUISITION SYSTE M
Bandwidth (− −3dB): LT354/ LT374/ LT372 Series: 500 MHz; LT264 Series/ LT262 Series: 350 MHz.
Bandwidth @ 50 ohms and at probe tip with PP006A probe. Bandwidth Limiter at 20 or 200 MHz can be
selected for each channel. LT584 Series: 1 GHz @ 50 ohms at probe tip with PP006A probe.
Input Impedance: 50 ohms ± 1.0%; 1M ohms ± 1.0% / / 12 pF typical (using PP006A probe)
Input Coupling: 1M ohms: AC, DC, GND; 50 ohms: DC, GND

Max Input: LT372/ 262/ 374/ 264: 50 ohms: 5 V rms; 1M ohms: 400 V max (peak AC ≤ 5 kHz
+ DC);
LT584 Series: 50 ohms: 5 V rms; 1M ohms: 250 V max (peak AC ≤ 5 kHz + DC)
Single Shot Sampling Rate: LT374 Series/ LT372 Series: 2 GS/ s; LT354/ LT264/ LT262 Series: 1 GS/ s
Acquisition Memory (4 channel): LT374L: 4 Mpts per channel; LT354ML: 2 Mpts per channel;
LT374M/ LT372M/ LT264M: 1 Mpts per channel; LT374/ LT372: 250 kpts per channel; LT264/ LT262:
100 kpts per channel
Acquisition Memory (2 channel): All 4-channel models have double the acquisition memory for 2 channels
as they do for 4 channels.
LT584 250 kpts per channel
LT584 M 1 Mpts per channel
LT584 L 4 Mpts per channel
Vertical Resolution: 8 bits
Sensitivity: 2 mV/ div to 10 V/ div fully variable; LT584: 50 ohms: 2 mV/ div to 1 V/ div; 1M ohms: 2 mV/ div
to 5 V/ div fully variable
DC Accuracy: ± (1.5% + 0.5% of full scale)

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 283


AP PE N DIX

Offset Range:
2 mV to 99 mV/ div: ± 1 V
100 mV to 99 V/ div: ± 10 V
1 V to 10 V/ div: ± 100 V
Interleaved Channels: LT584:2; LT374: 2; LT372: 1

ACQ U I SI T I O N M O D E S

MODE T I M E B ASE SE T T I N G M AXI M U M R AT E DE SCR I PT I ON

500 ps to 1000 s/ div 4 GS/ s


(LT354/ LT374/ LT372/ LT584) 1 GS/ s (LT354) One ADC per channel
Single Shot 1 ns to 1000 s/ div (2 ADCs per channel in
1 GS/ s interleaved mode)
(LT264/ LT262)
Random Interleaved Sampling
Repetitive 500 ps to 1 µs/ div 50 GS/ s
(RIS)
Sequence
LT262/ LT264 2 to 400 segments 1 GS/ s Stores Multiple Events with
LT372/ LT374/ time stamp in segmented
2 to 400 segments 4 GS/ s acquisition memories
LT584
1 GS/ s
Stores Multiple Events with
Memory Option (LT262/ 264/ 354)
2 to 1000 segments time stamp in segmented
M 4 GS/ s
acquisition memories
(LT372/ 374)
1 GS/ s
Stores Multiple Events with
Memory Option (LT262/ 264/ 354)
2 to 4000 segments time stamp in segmented
ML/ L 4 GS/ s
acquisition memories
(LT372/ 374)
≤ 500 kpts: Waveform slowly rolls across
Roll 500 ms to 1000s/ div 100 kS/ s display when used with slow
≥ 500 kpts: 1 s to 1000 s/ div time bases.

TIME BASE SYSTE M


Timebases: Main and up to four zoom traces simultaneously
Time/ Div Range: 500 ps/ div to 1000 s/ div
Clock Accuracy: ≤ 10 ppm
Interpolator Resolution: 5 ps
E xternal Clock: ≤ 500 MHz; 50 ohms, or 1M ohms impedance

284 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Architecture and Specifications

TRIGGE RIN G SYSTE M


Modes: NORMAL, AUTO, SINGL E and STOP
Sources: Any input channel, External, EXT 10 or line; slope, level, coupling unique to each except line.
Coupling Modes: DC, AC, HF, HFREJ, LFREJ (reject frequency 50 kHz typical)
Pre-Trigger Recording: 0–100% of horizontal time scale
Post Trigger Delay: 0–10 000 divisions
Holdoff by Time or E vents: Up to 20 s or from 1 to 99999999 events
Internal Trigger Range: ± 5 div
Maximum Trigger Frequency: Up to 500 MHz with HF coupling (LT584: 1 GHz; LT264/ LT262: Up to
350 MHz)

E xternal Trigger Input: ± 0.5 V, ± 5 V with Ext 10; max input same as input channels

SMART TRIGGE R TYPE S (ALL MODE L S)


Signal or pulse width: Triggers on glitches down to 2.5 ns. Pulse widths are selectable between < 2.5 ns to
20 s.
Signal interval: Triggers on intervals selectable between 10 ns and 20 s.
TV: Triggers on line (up to 1500) and fields 1, 2, 4, or 8 (odd or even) for PAL (SECAM), NTSC, or non-
standard video.
State/ E dge qualified: Triggers on any input source only if a defined state (or edge) has occurred on another
input source. Delay between sources is selectable by time or number of events.
Dropout: Triggers if the input signal drops out for longer than a selected time-out between 25 ns and 20 s.
Window: Triggers when the signal crosses the window boundaries, which extend above and below the selected
trigger level. A trigger event will occur when the signal leaves this window region in either direction and passes
into the upper or lower region. The next trigger will occur when the signal again passes into the window region.
Pattern (5 inputs): E nables triggering on a logical combination of the five inputs CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, CH 4
and EXT. This combination, called a pattern, is defined as the logical AND of trigger states.
Advanced Trigger Package (ATP) Option: Adds the following options
Runt: Positive or negative runts are defined by two voltage limits, and two time limits selectable between
2.5 ns and 20 s.
Slew Rate: Triggers on edge rates; select limits dV, dt, and slope.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 285


AP PE N DIX

AUTO SE TUP
Automatically sets timebase, trigger, and sensitivity to display a wide range of repetitive signals.
Vertical Find: Automatically sets sensitivity for the selected input signal

PROBE S
Model PP006A: PP006 with auto-detect: 10:1, 10M ohms; one probe per channel
Probe System: ProBus Intelligent Probe System supports active, high voltage, current, and differential probes,
and differential amplifiers

COLOR WAVE FORM DISPLAY


Type: Color 8.4-inch flat panel TFT LCD with VGA, 640 x 480 resolution
Screen Saver: Display blanks after 10 minutes
Real Time Clock: Date, hours, minutes, and seconds displayed with waveform
N umber of Traces: 8 max. Simultaneously display channel, zoom, memory, and math traces
Grid Styles: Single, Dual, Quad, Octal, XY, Single+ XY, Dual+ XY; Full Screen gives enlarged view of each
style
Waveform Display Styles: Sample dots joined or dots only — regular or bold sample point highlighting.

AN ALOG PE RSISTE N CE DISPL AY


Analog Persistence and Color Graded Persistence: Variable saturation levels; stores each trace’s persistence
data in memory
Trace Display: Opaque or transparent overlap

ZOOM E XPAN SION TRACE S


Style: Display up to four zoom traces
Vertical Zoom: Up to 5x expansion, 50x with averaging
Horizontal Zoom: Expand to 2 pts/ div, magnify to 50 000x
Autoscroll: Automatically scan and display any zoom or math trace

286 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Architecture and Specifications

RAPID SIGN AL PROCE SSIN G


Processor: 96 MHz Power PC
Processing Memory:
LT262/ L T 264 L T 372/ L T 374 L T 264/ L T 37/ L T 584 L T 374/ L T 584/
L T 584 WI T H O P T I O N M L T 354
WI T H O P T I O N L
32 M BYTES 32 M BYTES 64 M BYTES 128 M BYTES

Real-time Clock: Dates, hours, minutes, seconds; timestamp


trigger time to 1 ns resolution

IN TE RN AL WAVE FORM ME MORY


Waveform: M1, M2, M3, M4; memory length equal to acquisition memory
Zoom and Math: four traces (A, B, C, D); chained trace capability
Memories M1–4 and A–D store full-length waveforms with 16 bits/ data point

SE TUP STORAGE
For front panel and instrument status: Four non-volatile memories and floppy drive are standard; hard drive
and memory card are optional

MATH TOOLS
Simultaneously perform up to four math processing functions; traces can be chained together to perform math
on math. Standard functions: add, subtract, multiply, divide, inverse, identity, summation, summed averaging to
4000 sweeps, continuous averaging ERES low-pass digital filters for 11-bit vertical resolution, FFT of 50 kpt
waveforms, Extrema for displaying envelope, roof and floor, physical units, rescale (with units), (sin x)/ x,
resample (deskew).

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 287


AP PE N DIX

ME ASURE TOOLS
Cursor Measurements:
Relative Time: Two arrow cursors measure time and voltage differences relative to each other with a
resolution of ± 0.05% full scale.
Relative Amplitude (Voltage): Two horizontal bars measure voltage differences at ± 0.2% fs resolution.
Absolute Time: Cross-hair marker measures time relative to trigger and voltage with respect to ground.
Absolute Amplitude (Voltage): A horizontal reference line cursor measures voltage with respect to
ground.
Automated Measurements: Display any five parameters together with their average, high, low and standard
deviations.
Pass/ Fail: Test any five parameters against selectable thresholds. Limit testing is performed using masks
created on the scope or on a PC. Setup a pass or fail condition to initiate actions such as hardcopy output, save
waveform to memory, GPIB SRQ, or pulse out.

STAN DARD ME ASURE TOOL S


Includes measurement of amplitude, area, base, cyclic mean, cyclic rms, number of cycles, delay, delay
difference, duty cycle, fall time (90 to 10%), fall time (80 to 20%), frequency, maximum, mean, minimum,
positive overshoot, negative overshoot, peak-to-peak, period, phase, rise time (10 to 90%), rise time (20 to
80%), rms, standard deviation, top, width, horizontal location of highest and lowest value between cursors.

E XTE N DE D MATH AN D ME ASURE ME N TS OPTION


Adds math and advanced measurements for general purpose applications. Math Tools is expanded to include all
standard math plus integration, derivative, log and exponential (base e and base 10), square, square root,
absolute value, data log (when using the trend function), and histogram (200 events).
Measure tools is expanded to include measurement of cyclic median, cyclic standard deviation, time from
trigger to crossing level, time between transition levels of two sources (% or volts), time from clock to data
(setup time), time from clock to data (hold time), duration of falling edge between transition levels (% or volts),
first point, last point, number of points median, duration of rising edges between transition levels (% or volts),
duration.

WAVE AN ALYZE R OPTION


Adds math processing to include FFTs of 1-Mpt waveforms, power spectrum density (real and imaginary),
spectrum averaging, waveform averaging to one million sweeps, continuous averaging, and waveform
histograms up to 2 billion events and 18 histogram parameters. Includes the Extended Math and Measurement
option.

288 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Architecture and Specifications

SPE CIAL APPLICATION SOLUTION S


Jitter and Timing Analysis (JTA): Precision cycle-to-cycle timing measurements with enhanced accuracy,
histograms on persistence traces, persistence to waveform tracing and full statistical analysis.
PowerMeasure : A complete solution for the power conversion engineer. Includes timing deskew of voltage
and current, and rescale to electrical units.
Digital Filter Package (DFP): Provides eight standard linear-phase finite impulse response (FIR) filters.
Custom filters can be designed and imported. Cascade up to four filters.

IN TE RFACE
Remote Control: Full control via GPIB*, RS-232-C∗, and E thernet*
Floppy Drive: Internal, DOS format, 3.5" high density
PC Card Slot (optional): Supports memory and hard drive cards
E xternal Monitor Port: 15-pin D-Type VGA compatible*
Centronics Port: Parallel printer interface*
Internal graphics printer (optional): 25 mm/ s max, 112 mm paper width; provides hardcopy output in
< 10 seconds
E thernet (optional): 10BaseT*

OUTPUTS
Calibrator signal: 500 Hz–1 MHz square wave, −1.0 to + 1.0, test point and ground lug on front panel
Control signals: Choice of trigger ready, trigger out, or Pass/ Fail status; TTL levels into 1 MΩ at rear panel
BNC (output resistance 300 Ω ± 10%)

GE N E RAL
Operating Conditions: Temperature 5–45 °C; Humidity 80% RH max. (non-condensing) up to 35 °C (derates
to 50% max. RH at 45 °C). Altitude 4500 m max. up to 25 °C (derates to 2000 m max. at 45 °C)
Shock and Vibration: Conforms to selected sections of MIL-PRF-28800F, Class 3
Power Requirements: 100–120 V (± 10%) AC at 50/ 60/ 400 (± 10%) Hz, or 200–240 V (± 10%) AC at 50/ 60
(± 10%) Hz; automatic AC voltage selection; Power consumption: 250 VA max. (depending on model)
Dimensions (HWD): 210 mm x 350 mm x 300 mm (8.3" x 13.8" x 11.8"); height excludes scope feet
Weight: 8.5 kg (19 lbs.) excluding accessories and internal printer; 9 kg (20 lbs.) excluding accessories, including
internal printer


Use properly shielded cables to conform to CE requirements (EMC Directive 89/ 336/ EEC).

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 289


AP PE N DIX

Warranty and Calibration: Three years; calibration recommended yearly


Certifications: CE, UL and cUL
CE Declaration of Conformity: The oscilloscope meets requirements of the EMC Directive 89/ 336/ E EC
for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage Directive 73/ 23/ EEC for Product Safety.

EMC Directive EN 61326-1:1997 + A1:1998


EMC requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control,
and laboratory use.

Electromagnetic Emissions: EN 55022: 1998, Class A Radiated and conducted


emissions

EN 61000-3-2:1995 + A1:1998 + A2:1998 Harmonic Current


Emissions
EN 61000-3-3:1995 Voltage Fluctuations and
Flickers
Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Electromagnetic Immunity EN 61000-4-2:1995 + A1:1998* Electrostatic Discharge

EN 61000-4-3:1996 + A1:1998* RF Radiated Electromagnetic Field

EN 61000-4-4:1995* Electrical Fast Transient/ Burst

EN 61000-4-5:1995* Surges

EN 61000-4-6:1996* RF Conducted Electromagnetic Field

EN 61000-4-11:1994† Mains Dips and Interruptions

* Meets Performance Criteria “B” limits —during the disturbance, product undergoes a temporary degradation
or loss of function of performance which is self recoverable.
†Meets Performance Criteria “C” limits —during the disturbance, product undergoes a temporary degradation
or loss of function of performance which requires operator intervention or system reset.

290 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Architecture and Specifications

Low Voltage Directive: EN 61010-1: 1993 + A2:1995


Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control,
and laboratory use.
The oscilloscope has been qualified to the following E N 61010-1
category:
300 V Installation (Overvoltage) Category II.
Pollution Degree 2
Protection Class I

UL and cUL Certifications: UL Standard: UL 3111-1

Canadian Standard: CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002 291


AP PE N DIX

BLANK PAGE

292 ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


Acquisition Time: In a sample-and-hold or track-and-hold circuit, the time required after the sample or track
command for the output to slew through a full-scale voltage change and settle to its final value within a
specified error band.
ACSN : auto-correlation signal-to-noise
ADC: analog-to-digital converter.
Aliasing: Whenever a dynamic signal is synchronously sampled, a possibility of misunderstanding its frequency
content exists. This difficulty is termed “aliasing” and occurs whenever the sampling rate is less than twice the
highest frequency component in the signal being measured.
AN D: Logical designation or circuit function meaning that all inputs must be in the TRUE state for a TRUE
output.
Aperture Jitter: In a sample-hold or ADC, the jitter between the time of the sample (or convert) command
pulse and the time the input signal is actually sampled. This jitter is usually due to thermal noise. It leads to an
uncertainty in the sampled amplitude equal to delta t*dV/ dt, where delta t is the aperture jitter, and dV/ dt is
the rate of change of the input voltage at the time of sampling. The terms “aperture jitter” and “aperture
uncertainty” are often used interchangeably.
Aperture Uncertainty: In a sample-hold or ADC, the total uncertainty in the time of the sample (or convert)
command pulse and the time the input signal is actually sampled, due to all causes including noise, signal
amplitude-dependent delay variation (as in a flash ADC), temperature, etc. Often used interchangeably with
“aperture jitter,” but “aperture uncertainty” is the more inclusive term.
Area: In a time domain DSO waveform measurement, area is the sum of the sampled values between the
cursors times the duration of a sample.
Artifact Rejection: Used in summed averaging to exclude waveforms that have exceeded the dynamic range of
the recording system.
Automatic Setup: In an oscilloscope, automatic scaling of the timebase, trigger, and sensitivity settings.
Provides a stable display of repetitive input signals.
Average: See Mean Value, Summed Averaging and Continuous Averaging.
AWG: arbitrary wave generator
Bandwidth: In normal use, the frequency range over which the gain of an amplifier or other circuit does not
vary by more than 3 dB.
BE R: See Bit Error Rate.
Binning: A technique for combining points in a histogram to be compatible with the resolution of the display
device.
Bit: An abbreviation of “binary digit,” one of the two numbers, 0 and 1, used to encode data. A bit is often
expressed by a high or low electrical voltage.
Bit E rror Rate: Ratio of the number of bits of a message incorrectly received to the total number received.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


293
CCD: Charge Coupled Device. An integrated circuit that allows the transfer of a variable amount of charge
through a series of cells; an analog shift register.
CCTM: clock certification test module
Channel: A path through an arrangement of components (modules and electrical or optical cabling or both)
along which signals can be sent.
Clamping: Holding a circuit point to some reference level (frequently ground) by means of a low-impedance
element such as a saturated transistor, FET, forward-biased diode, relay, etc.
Coherent Gain: The normalized coherent gain of a filter corresponding to each window function is 1.0 (0 dB)
for the rectangular window and less than 1.0 for other windows. It defines the loss of signal energy due to the
multiplication by the window function.
Common Mode Range: The maximum range (usually voltage) within which differential inputs can operate
without a loss of accuracy.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio: The ratio of the common-mode input voltage to the output voltage
expressed in dB. The extent to which a differential amplifier does not provide an output voltage when the same
signal is applied to both inputs.
Common Mode Signal (N oise): The signal (usually noise) that appears equally and in phase on each of the
differential signal conductors to ground. See Differential Input.
Continuous Averaging: Sometimes called “exponential averaging,” the technique consists of the repeated
addition, with unequal weight, of successive source waveforms. Each new waveform is added to the
accumulated average according to the formula: S(i,new) = N/ (N+ 1) * [S(i,old) + 1/ (N+ 1) * W(i)] where i =
index over all data points of the waveforms; W(i) = newly acquired wave form; S(i,old) = old accumulated
average; S(i,new) = new accumulated average; N = weighting factor (1,3,7...).
Conversion Cycle: E ntire sequence involved in changing data from one form to another, e.g., digitizing an
analog quantity, changing binary data to BCD, etc.
Crosstalk: Unwanted coupling of a signal from one channel to another.
Cursor: A visible marker that identifies a horizontal or vertical position, or both, on an oscilloscope display.
LeCroy DSOs offer “waveform riding” cursors that conveniently give both the horizontal and vertical values
without selecting one or the other.
DAC: digital-to-analog converter
Data Logger: An instrument that accepts input signals (usually slow analog), digitizes them, and stores the
results in memory for later readout. The digital equivalent of a strip-chart recorder.
DC: Direct current. Normally means a voltage or current that remains constant.
DC Level Shift: A change in the nominal DC voltage level present in a circuit.
DC Offset: See DC Level Shift. This term may imply that the shift is intentional, for example, adjustable by a
control knob.

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


294
DC Overload: An overload signal of long duration compared to the normal input pulse width or duty ratio of
a circuit.
Dead Time: In a digital oscilloscope, the dead time is the time from the end of one acquisition of data to the
start of the next acquisition.
Decimation: The process of reconstructing a source waveform with a reduced number of data points by using
only every nth data point, where n is an integer.
Differential Input: A circuit with two inputs that is sensitive to the algebraic difference between the two.
Differential Linearity: A term often inappropriately used to mean differential non-linearity.
Differential N on-Linearity: 1. The percentage departure from the average of the slope of the plot of output
versus input from the slope of a reference line; 2. The percentage of variation in ADCs or TDCs from the
mean of the analog (or time) width of any single digital step. It is usually measured by driving the input with a
large number of random amplitude pulses and then measuring the relative number of events in each digital bin.
Differential Output: A circuit with two outputs supplying one normal and one complementary level of output
signal.
Differential Pulses: Two opposite polarity pulses coincident in time.
Dithering: Typically used when averaging signals (which have low noise content) to improve vertical resolution
and decrease the effects of an ADC's non-linearities. The technique applies different offsets to each incoming
waveform to ensure the signal is not always digitized by the same portion of the ADC. The offsets must be
subtracted from the recorded signals before being included in the summed average.
Digital Filtering: The manipulation of digital data to both enhance desirable and to remove undesirable
aspects of the data.
Dropout Trigger: A trigger that occurs if the input signal drops out for a time period longer than a preset
amount (between 25 ns to 20 s on some LeCroy DSOs). This is very useful for triggering on microprocessor
crashes, network hang-ups, bus contention problems or other phenomena where a signal stops occurring.
Duty Cycle: A computed value in digital scopes representing the average duration above midpoint value as a
percentage of the period for time domain waveforms.
Dynamic Range: The ratio of the largest to smallest signal that can be accurately processed by a module.
Dynamic RAM (DRAM): A random access memory in which the internal memory must be refreshed
periodically.
E CL: Emitter-coupled logic, an unsaturated logic performed by emitter-coupled transistors. Usually, ECL
LOGICAL 1 = −1.6 V and LOGICAL 0 = −0.8 V.
E MI: Electromagnetic interference caused by current or voltage induced into a signal conductor by an
electromagnetic field.
E N BW (E quivalent N oise Bandwidth): For a filter associated with each frequency bin, ENBW is the
bandwidth of an equivalent rectangular filter (having the same gain at the center frequency) that would collect
the same power from a white noise signal.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


295
E nhanced Resolution (E RE S): A facility in LeCroy DSOs to increase the amplitude resolution of single-shot
waveform measurements. This technique, which applies digital filtering to achieve resolution enhancement at a
reduced bandwidth, is optimum when the sampling rate of the instrument exceeds that required for the input
signal bandwidth. For repetitive signals, either ERES or Signal Averaging, or both, can be used to achieve
higher resolution with substantially smaller loss of bandwidth than for single-shot signals.
E nvelope: The maximum, minimum, or maximum and minimum values of a sequence of measured
waveforms. In LeCroy DSOs, the number is programmable from 1 to 106.
E PROM: Erasable, programmable read-only memory. An integrated circuit memory array that is made with a
pattern of either all logical zeros or ones and has a pattern written into it by the user with a special hardware
program.
E quivalent Time Sampling (E QT): (Also known as E TS.) A means of exploiting multiple acquisitions of a
repetitive signal to increase the usable bandwidth of a digitizer by making it appear to sample more rapidly than
its maximum single-shot sample rate. Works only with stable, repetitive signals.
E xtrema: The computation of a waveform envelope, by repeated comparison of successive waveforms, of all
maximum points (roof) and all minimum points (floor). Whenever a given data point of the new waveform
exceeds the corresponding maximum value in the roof record, it is used to replace the previous value.
Whenever a given data point of the new waveform is smaller than the corresponding floor value, it is used to
replace the previous value.
Falltime: Unless otherwise defined, the time required for a pulse to go from 90 % to 10 % of full amplitude.
Can also refer generally to the trailing edge of a pulse.
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT): In signal processing applications, an FFT is a mathematical algorithm that
takes a discrete source waveform, defined over n points, and computes n complex Fourier coefficients, which
are interpreted as harmonic components of the input signal. For a “real” source waveform (imaginary part
equals 0), there are n/ 2 independent harmonic components.
Feedthrough: An unwanted signal that passes a closed gate or disabled input.
FFT: See Fast Fourier Transform.
FFT Frequency Bins: A Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) corresponds to analyzing the input signal with a bank
of n/ 2 filters, all having the same shape and width, and centered at n/ 2 discrete frequencies. Each filter collects
the signal energy that falls into the immediate neighborhood of its center frequency, and thus it can be said that
there are n/ 2 “frequency bins.” The distance, in Hz, between the center frequencies of two neighboring bins is
always: delta f = 1/ T, where T is the duration of the time-domain records in seconds. The nominal width of
bin is equal to delta f.
FFT Frequency Range: The range of frequencies computed and displayed in an FFT is 0 Hz to the Nyquist
frequency.
FFT Frequency Resolution: In a narrow sense, the frequency resolution is equal to the bin width, delta f.
That is, if the input signal changes its frequency by delta f, the corresponding spectrum peak will be displaced
by delta f. For smaller changes of frequency, only the shape of the peak will change. However, the effective
frequency resolution (i.e., the ability to resolve two signals whose frequencies are almost the same) is further

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


296
limited by the use of window functions. The ENBW value of all windows other than the rectangular is greater
than delta f (i.e., greater than the bin width).
FFT N umber of Points: FFT is computed over the number of points (Transform Size) whose upper bound
is the source number of points. FFT generates spectra having n/ 2 output points.
FFT Total Power: Area under the power density spectrum in frequency-domain measurements.
FIFO: First-in, first-out shift registers (sometimes called first-in, first-out memory).
Filter: An electronic circuit or digital data manipulation routine that either enhances desirable or removes
undesirable aspects of an analog waveform or its digital representation. Filters are used to block specific
frequency components from passing through a circuit, to linearize otherwise identical components (such as
CCDs) used in a common circuit, or to perform waveform integration, differentiation, or smoothing, just to
name a few types.
Flash ADC: A very fast analog-to-digital converter, usually consisting of a large set of fast comparators and
associated logic, in which the analog signal simultaneously is compared to 2n − 1 different reference voltages,
where n is the ADC resolution. Also called a parallel converter.
Floor: The record of points that make the bottom (or minimum) of an envelope created from a succession of
waveforms.
FWHM: Full-Width Half Maximum. The width of a pulse or waveform at 50 % amplitude used to measure
the duration of a signal.
Gate: 1. A circuit element used to provide a logical function (e.g., AND, OR); 2. An input control signal or
pulse enabling the passage of other signals.
Glitch: A spike or short-time duration structural aberration on an otherwise smooth waveform that is normally
characterized by more gradual amplitude changes. In digital electronics, where the circuit under test uses an
internal clock, a glitch can be considered to be any pulse narrower than the clock width.
Glitch Trigger: A trigger on pulse widths smaller than a given value.
Ground Loop: A long ground connection along which voltage drops occur due either to heavy circuit current
or external pick-up, with the result that circuit elements referred to different points along it operate at different
effective ground references.
Hamming Code: An error-correcting code used in data transmission.
HF Sync: Reduces the trigger rate by including a frequency divider in the trigger path, enabling the input
trigger rate to exceed the maximum for repetitive signals.
Histogram: A graphical representation of data such that the data is divided into intervals or bins. The intervals
or bins are then plotted on a bar chart where the height is proportional to the number of data points contained
in each interval or bin.
Holdoff by E vents: Selects a minimum number of events between triggers. An event is generated when the
trigger source meets its trigger conditions. A trigger is generated when the trigger condition is met after the
selected number of events from the last trigger. The hold-off by events is initialized and started on each
trigger.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


297
Holdoff by Time: Selects a minimum time between triggers. A trigger is generated when the trigger condition
is met after the selected delay from the last trigger. The timing for the delay is initialized and started on each
trigger.
HPGL: Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language Format; Hewlett-Packard Company.
Hybrid Circuit: A small, self-contained, high-density circuit element usually consisting of screened or
deposited conductors, insulating areas, resistors, etc., with welded or bonded combinations of discrete circuit
elements and integrated circuit chips.
IC: Integrated Circuit. A self-contained, multiple-element circuit such as a monolithic or hybrid.
Integral Linearity: A term often used inappropriately to mean integral non-linearity.
Integral N on-Linearity: Deviation of ADC response from an appropriate straight line fit. The specification is
sometimes defined as maximum deviation, expressed as a fraction of full scale. More recent ADCs have a
specification expressed as a percent of reading plus a constant.
Interleaved Clocking: Supplying clock pulses of equal frequency but different identical circuits or instruments
in order to increase the system sample rate. For example, use of two transient recorders with inputs in parallel
but complementary clocks to allow operation at twice the maximum rate of a single unit.
Interval Trigger: Selects an interval between two edges of the same slope. The trigger can be generated on the
second edge if it occurs within the selected interval or after the selected interval. The timing for the interval is
initialized and restarted whenever the selected edge occurs.
Jitter: Short-term fluctuations in the output of a circuit or instrument that are independent of the input.
Leakage: When observing the Power Spectrum of a sine wave having an integral number of periods in the
time window using the rectangular window, leakage is the broadening of the base of the peak spectral
component that accurately represents the source waveform’s amplitude.
Limiter: A circuit element that limits the amplitude of an input (used for input protection, pulse standardizing,
etc.).
Logical 1: A signal level indicating the TRUE state; corresponds to the unit being set (i.e., if interrogated, the
answer is yes).
Logical 0: A signal level indicating the FALSE state; corresponds to the unit NOT being set (i.e., if
interrogated, the answer is no).
Long-term Stability: Refers to stability over a long time, such as several days or months.
MCA: multichannel analyzer (e.g., pulse height analyzer)
Mean Value: Average or DC level of all data points selected in a waveform.
Median Value: The data value of a waveform above and below which there are an equal number of data
points.
Mode Value: The most frequently occurring data value of a waveform.

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


298
Monolithic IC: An integrated circuit whose elements (transistors, diodes, resistors, small capacitors, etc.) are
formed on or within a semiconductor substrate.
Monotonic: A function with a derivative that does not change sign.
Multiplexer: A device used to selectively switch a number of signal paths to one input or output.
NAN D: An AND circuit, except with a complementary (negative true) output.
N egation: The process of transposing all negative values into positives and all positive values into negatives.
N LTS: non-linear transition shift
N oise E quivalent Power: NEP (W); the RMS value of optical power that is required to produce unity RMS
signal-to-noise ratio.
N OR: An OR circuit, except with a complementary (negative true) output.
N RZ: non-return to zero
N yquist Frequency: The Nyquist frequency (f/ 2) is the maximum frequency that can be accurately measured
by a digitizer sampling at a rate of (f). In other terms, a digitizer sampling at a rate of (f) cannot measure an
input signal with bandwidth components exceeding f/ 2 without experiencing “aliasing” inaccuracies.
Offset: The amount by which an analog or digital output or input baseline is shifted with respect to a specific
reference value (usually zero).
OR: A logic circuit having the property that if at least one input is true, the output is true.
Overshoot, N egative: A time-domain parameter in waveform measurements, equal to the base value of a
waveform minus the minimum sample value, expressed as a percentage of the amplitude.
Overshoot, Positive: A time-domain parameter in waveform measurements, equal to the maximum sample
value minus the top value, expressed as a percentage of the amplitude. The top value is the most probable state
determined from a statistical distribution of data point values in the waveform.
Parallel Converter: A technique for analog-to-digital conversion in which the analog signal is simultaneously
compared to 2n - 1 different reference voltages, where n is the ADC resolution.
Pass/ Fail Testing: Post-acquisition testing of a waveform against a reference mask or of waveform
parameters against reference values.
PCMCIA: Personal Computer Memory Card Industry Association standard for PC memory cards. Also
known as JE IDA in Japan.
PCX: The PC Paintbrush Format for graphic images; ZSoft Corporation, Marietta, GA.
Peak Spectral Amplitude: Amplitude of the largest frequency component in a waveform in frequency
domain analysis.
Period: A full period is the time measured between the first and third 50 % crossing points (mesial points) of a
cyclic waveform.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


299
Persistence: A display operating mode of a DSO where a user-determined number of measured traces remain
on the display without being erased and overwritten.
PE S: position error signal
PHA (Pulse Height Analyzer): A device that gives a measure of the amplitude of a signal applied to its
input.
Picket Fence E ffect: In FFT, if a sine wave has a whole number of periods in the time-domain record, the
Power Spectrum obtained with the rectangular window will have a sharp peak, corresponding exactly to the
frequency and amplitude of the sine wave. If it does not, the spectrum obtained will be lower and broader. The
highest point in the power spectrum can be 3.92 dB lower (1.57 times) when the source frequency is halfway
between two discrete bin frequencies. This variation of the spectrum magnitude is called the Picket Fence
Effect (the loss is called the Scallop Loss). All window functions compensate this loss to some extent, but the
best compensation is obtained with the Flat Top window.
Power Spectrum: The square of the magnitude spectrum (V 2). The Power Spectrum is displayed on the dBm
scale, with 0 dBm corresponding to V 2ref = (0.316 V peak)2, where V ref is the peak value of the sinusoidal
voltage which is equivalent to 1 mW into 50 (omega).
Power Density Spectrum: The Power Spectrum divided by the equivalent noise bandwidth of the filter
(V 2/ Hz), in Hz. The Power Density Spectrum is displayed on the dBm scale, with 0 dBm corresponding to
(V 2ref/ Hz).
Pre-trigger Sampling: A design concept used in transient recording in which a predetermined number of
samples taken before a stop trigger are preserved.
PRML: pulse response maximum likelihood
Pulse Width: Determines the duration between the Pulse Start (mesial point, i.e., the 50 % magnitude
transition point, on the leading edge) and the Pulse Stop (mesial point on the trailing edge) of a pulse
waveform.
Pulse Start: The 50 % magnitude transition point (mesial point) on the leading edge of a pulse waveform.
Pulse Stop: The 50 % magnitude transition point (mesial point) on the trailing edge of a pulse waveform.
Pulse Trigger: Selects a pulse width, either maximum or minimum. The trigger is generated on the selected
edge when the pulse width is either greater than or less than the selected width. The timing for the width is
initialized and restarted on the edge opposite to the edge selected.
RAM: A memory in which each data address can either be written into or read from at any time.
Random Interleaved Sampling (RIS): One method of E QT (or ETS). Acting upon stable, repetitive signals,
it represents the process of storing different full sampling sweeps in a DSO or digitizer system, where each
sweep is slightly offset from the other to achieve a higher effective sampling rate than the single-shot rate. A
major advantage of RIS over other EQT techniques is “pretrigger viewing.”
Real Time: A process that occurs without having to pause for internal conversions and references. Real Time
processes usually have little or no intrinsic dead time and are able to proceed at a rate that permits almost
simultaneous transitions from inputs to outputs.

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


300
Reciprocal: The division of unity by the data value being processed.
Reflection Coefficient: The amount of signal amplitude that is reflected from an input, expressed as a
percentage of the original input signal.
Resolution: The minimum measurable increment, such as one bit level of an ADC.
Reverse Termination: An output so constructed that pulses reflected back from the rest of the system meet a
matching impedance and are absorbed.
RF (Radio Frequency): Normally in the megahertz range.
RFI (Radio Frequency Interference): A special case of EMI wherein the field causing the induced signal
falls into the radio portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Risetime: Unless otherwise defined, the time required for a pulse to go from 10 % to 90 % of full amplitude.
Can also refer generally to the leading edge of a pulse.
RMS (Root Mean Square): Is derived from the square root of the average of the squares of the magnitudes,
for all the data as described above. For time-domain waveforms, the square root of the sum of squares divided
by the number of points for the part of the measured waveform between the cursors. For histogram
waveforms, the square root of sum of squares divided by number of values computed on the distribution.
ROM: Read-only memory is any type of memory that cannot be readily rewritten. The information is stored
on a permanent basis and used repeatedly. Usually randomly accessible.
Roof: The record of points that make the top (or maximum) of an envelope created from a succession of
waveforms.
SAM: sequenced amplitude margin
Sample and Hold: A circuit that, on command, stores on a capacitor the instantaneous amplitude of an input
signal.
Sampling Frequency: The clock rate at which samples are taken during the process of digitizing an analog
signal in a DSO or digitizer.
Scallop Loss: Loss associated with the picket fence effect.
SE CAM: sequence and memory color television system
Sensitivity: 1. The minimum signal input capable of causing an output signal with the desired characteristics.
2. The ratio of the magnitude of the instrument response to the input magnitude (e.g., a voltage ADC has a
sensitivity that is usually measured in counts/ mV). Often, sensitivity is referred to the input and is therefore
stated as the inverse.
Shot N oise: Noise caused by current fluctuations, due to the discrete nature of charge carriers and random
emission of charged particles from an emitter. Many refer to shot noise loosely, when speaking of the mean
square shot noise current (amps) rather than a noise power (watts).
SMART Trigger: The SMART Trigger allows the setting of additional qualifications before a trigger is
generated. These qualifications can be used to capture rare phenomena such as glitches or spikes, specific logic

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


301
states or missing bits. One qualification can include, for example, generating a trigger only on a pulse wider or
narrower than specified.
Smoothing, N -Point: The process of evening out the display of a waveform by displaying a moving average
of “N” adjacent data points added to each other.
SN R: Signal-to-Noise Ratio is the ratio of the magnitude of the signal to that of the noise.
Square: The process of multiplying a value by itself.
Stage Delay: The time delay in a circuit between input and output, usually measured between the front edges
(half maximum) of the respective signals.
Standard Deviation: The standard deviation of the measured points from the mean. It is calculated from the
following formula:
Standard Trigger: Standard Trigger causes a trigger to occur whenever the selected trigger source meets its
conditions, which are defined by the trigger level, coupling, high-frequency sync, and slope. Edge trigger is
Waverunner’s standard trigger type.
State Qualified: State-Qualified triggering generates a trigger when the trigger source meets its conditions
during the selected pattern. A pattern is defined as a logical AND combination of trigger states. A trigger state
is either high or low  high when a trigger source is greater than the trigger level, and low if it is less than the
trigger level.
Stop Trigger: A pulse that is used to stop a transient recording or similar sequence.
Summed, or Summation, Averaging: The repeated addition, with equal weight, of successive waveforms
divided by the total number of waveforms acquired.
TAA: track average amplitude
TDC: Time-to-digital converter.
Terminate: Normally, to provide a matching impedance at the end of coaxial cable to prevent reflections.
Test Template: A general form of waveshape limit test, which defines an arbitrary limit (or non-uniform
tolerance) on each measured point in a waveform.
TFT: thin film transistor
Threshold: The voltage or current level at which a circuit will respond to a signal at its input. Also referred to
as trigger level.
TIE : time interval error
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format): Industry standard for bit-mapped graphic files.
Time Between Patterns: Selects a delay, either maximum or minimum, between exiting one pattern and
entering the next. The trigger is generated on entering the second pattern either within the selected time or
after the selected minimum time.
Timeout: A Timeout occurs when a protective timer completes its assigned time without the expected event
occurring. Timeouts prevent the system from waiting indefinitely in case of error or failure.

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


302
Time Qualified: Time-Qualified triggering generates a trigger when the trigger source meets its trigger
condition after entering or exiting the pattern. The trigger can occur even if the pattern disappears before the
trigger meets its trigger conditions.
Tolerance Mask: A form of waveshape limit test that defines a maximum deviation equal to a uniform
tolerance on each measured point in a waveform.
Track and Hold: A circuit preceding an analog-to-digital converter that has the ability on command to store
instantaneous values of a rapidly varying analog signal. Allows the ADC to accurately digitize within tighter
time domains.
Transient Recorder: See Waveform Digitizer.
TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic): Signal levels defined as follows: LOGICAL 0 = 0 to 0.8 V and
LOGICAL 1 = 2.0 to 5.0 V.
Trend: Plot of a parameter value or other characteristic of a measurement over a period of time.
VIS: Viterbi input samples
Waveform Digitizer: An instrument that samples an input waveform at specified intervals, digitizes the analog
values at the sampled points, and stores the results in a digital memory.
Window Functions: Used to modify the spectrum of a truncated waveform prior to Fourier analysis.
Alternately, window functions determine the selectivity (filter shape) in a Fourier transform spectrum analyzer.
In LeCroy scopes, all window functions belong to the sum of cosines family with one to three non-zero cosine
terms [W = …am cos(2¼k/ N], where N is the number of points in the decimated source waveform, and k is
the time index).
X-Y Display: A plot of one trace against another trace. This technique is normally used to compare the
amplitude information of two waveforms. It can reveal phase and frequency information through the analysis
of patterns called Lissajous figures.

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002


303
BLANK PAGE

ISSUED: January 2002 WR2-OM-E Rev C


304
Index

Binning, 214
A And Measurement Accuracy, 231
Setting, 219
Absolute mode, 63, 71 Blackman-Harris, 81, 162
AC, 18, 20, 45, 81, 119 Block Diagram, 281
Acquisition Memory, 279, 281 BNC, 23
Acquisition Summary field, 32 and CAL Setup, 39
ActiveDSO, 17, 257, 271, 272 Use of signal output, 41
Control Instantiation, 271
Power Point, 272 C
ADC (Analog-to-Digital Converter), 101, 279, 281
Add New Directory, 93 CAL and BNC Setup, 39
ADD OPTION KE Y, 26 Calibration, 16
Add Software Options, 26 Automatic, 280
Algorithms, 75 of Passive Probe, 40
Amplitude (ampl), 179 CHANGE COLORS, 143
Amplitude cursors, 67, 68, 71 CHANGE PARAM menu, 166, 171, 206, 214,
Analog Persistence, 6, 8, 140, 280 215, 222
Green button, 51, 52, 55, 139, 146 CHANGE TEST menu, 173, 175
Specifications, 285 Cleaning, 21
use, 9, 118 Clear Sweeps button, 53, 74, 152, 153, 158, 224
Vector diagram, 147 Clock Edge, 178
Analysis Packages, 65 Color, 58, 59, 142, 143, 144
Acquisition Mode Table, 283 Background, 58, 144
Acquisition System Specifications, 282 List, 145
Area, 179 Linking Objects, 58
ASCII, Saving waveforms, 192, 193, 195, 256 Opaque, 59, 142
Formats, 192 Transparent, 59, 142
Setup, 194 Color-Graded Persistence, 51, 53, 139, 141
Auto mode button, 46 Combining Channels, 104
Auto Scroll, 34, 35 Configuring to Communicate with PC
Auto Setup button, 31, 113, 117, 127, 285 Connected to Network, 263
Automatic Recalibration, 34 Not Connected to Network, 264
Average (avg), 223, 233 Connecting to a Host, 261
Averaging, Continuous Average, 83, 153
Continuous, 83, 153 Copy, 90, 94
Summed, 83, 84, 153 Coupling, 38, 48, 117, 127
Determining, 45, 119
B Cursors, 63
Amplitude (Voltage), 63, 67, 68, 71
Back Panel, See Rear Panel and FFTs, 158
Background color, 58 and Persistence, 63
Bandwidth Limit (BWL), 38 Bold, 3
Base, 179 Difference, 68, 69
Bi-level Pattern Trigger, 134 in Absolute mode, 63

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002

305
Index

in Relative mode, 63, 68, 69 Duty cycle (duty), 181


in XY Display, 64, 148, 149
Measurement, 210, 212, 287 E
menu, 3
Parameter, 211, 223 Edge Trigger, 43
Set up, 66 Setup, 44
Time (Frequency), 63, 67, 71, 224 Hold Off by Time or Events, 111
Turn off, 65 Enhanced Resolution (ERES), 154, 155, 157
Cycles, 179 Ethernet Option, 255
Cyclic Mean (cmean), 179 Communicating with Network PC, 263, 268
Cyclic Median (cmedian), 179 Communicating with Non-network PC, 264
Cyclic Root Mean Square (crms), 180 PC Requirements, 262
Cyclic Standard Deviation (csdev), 180 Physical Connection, 266
Exclusion Trigger, 114
D Extended Math and Measurement Option (E MM),
77, 287
Data Edge, 178 External Clock mode, 108
Data Points, 142 Extrema, 151, 152
Data Transfer, 189, 190
DC, 45, 119 F
Dead time, Limiting with Sequence mode, 103
Delay knob, 43, 44, 118, 128 Fall 80-20% (f80-20%), 181
Delay, Fall at Level (f@ level), 181
Parameter, 180 Fall time, 176, 177, 181
Post-trigger, 101 Falling Edge Duration equation, 177
Pre-trigger, 101 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT), 5, 7
Delta Delay (∆dly), 180 Average, 158
Delta t at level (∆t@ lv), 180 and Cursors, 158
Delta clock to data ± (∆c2d± ), 180 Error Messages, 159
Deskew, 164 Frequency range, 158, 160
Difference cursor, 68, 69 Perform, 80
Digital Filter Package (DFP), 288 Window Filter Parameter table, 162
Directory, Adding New, 93 Span, 161
Display File Names,
Setup, 52, 142 Customize, 92
Specifications, 285 Defaults, 95
Standard, 71 File Extensions, 95
System, 280 Fill (file naming), 96
XY, 64, 146, 148 Filters
Display button, 26, 51, 67, 146 FIR, 156
Displayed Trace Low-pass, 157
label, 32 FIND CE NTER AND HE IGHT function, 166,
field, 210, 212 168
Dropout Trigger, 127, 128 FIND CE NTER AND WIDTH function, 213,
Duration (dur), 181 214, 215, 218, 221

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002

306
Index

Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filters, 156 Menu, 214, 215


Firmware, Updating, 26 Parameter Buffer, 228, 232
First parameter (first), 182 Parameter Events, 229
Flat Top, 81, 162 Parameters, 222, 229
Floor (minima), 151 Peak, 230, 231
Frequency, Population, 227
Parameter (freq), 182 Process, 228
Nyquist, 80 Range, 224
FROM DEFAULT SETUP, 25 Root Mean Square (hrms), 240
Front Panel, 22 Segmented Waveforms, 230
Virtual, 256 Setup for in WaveAnalyzer, 205
Full Width at Half Maximum (fwhm), 234 Top (htop), 241
Full Width at xx% Maximum (fwxx), 235 Zoom Traces, 230
History, See also WaveformHistory
G button, 8
Data collection, 55
General Specifications, 288 Setup, 56
Glitch Trigger, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117 Hold Off
Global Bandwidth Limit (GBWL), 34, 38 By Events, 111, 112, 132, 134
GPIB, 89, 90, 189, 190, 257, 280, 281 By Time, 111, 132, 134
Graph Hysteresis range, 178
function, 5
menu, 6, 7 I
Grid intensity, 52
Grid style, 58 Icons, 12
IE E E Standard, 255, 261
H Infinite, 53, 54
Information Window, 218
Hamming, 81, 162 Initialize, 25
Hanning, See V onHann Interface, 281, 288
Hard Copy, 89 Integral, 163
Interfaces, 89 Interval Trigger, 120
Setup, 89 Between Range, 123
HF, 45 Larger, 122
HFREJ, 45, 119 Smaller, 121
High parameter, 238
Histogram, 5, 176, 209 J
Amplitude (hampl), 236
Base (hbase), 237 Jitter and Timing Analysis (JTA) Package, 288
Binning and Scale, 219 JitterTrack, 5, 6
Creating, 213
Data Acquisition sequence, 228 K
Example, 216-218
Measurement Accuracy, 231 Knobs,
Median (hmedian), 239 Delay, 43, 44, 128
Offset, 34

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002

307
Index

Position, 31, 36 Measure menu, 73, 223, 224


Time/ div, 33 Measure Tools, 287
Trigger Level, 43, 44 Measurement Cursor, 210, 212, 223
Volts/ div, 34 Median parameter, 182
Zoom, 31, 36 Memory Used, See Status Report
Memories, 279, 281
L Menus, 24
Message field, 33
LAN10BT, 23, 261 Measure Gate, 142
Last parameter (last), 182 Minima, 151
Level, determining, 45, 119 Minimum parameter, 183
LFREJ, 45, 119 Mode parameter, 223, 244
LinConstMax vertical scale, 221 Modify Mask menu, 175
Line voltage, 48 MORE DISPLAY menu, 142
Linear vertical scale, 219 Multi-Zoom, 34, 35
List of Products, 15
Logarithmic vertical scale, 220 N
Low parameter, 242
Normal mode button, 46, 55, 114, 118
M NTSC, 132, 133
Nyquist Frequency, 80, 158, 160, 161
Magnitude, 81
Maintenance Agreements, 16 O
Mask,
Making, 175 Offset knob, 34
Pass/ Fail Testing on, 174 On/ Standby Switch, 20
Mass Storage, 91, 95 Opaque, 59
Terms, 96 Option, Adding, 26
Math, Output Specifications, 288
Extended Option, 77 Overshoot, 40
Setup, 78 Negative (over-), 183
Standard, 77 Positive (over+ ), 183
Tools, 77, 79, 163
Type menu, 154 P
WaveAnalyzer Option, 77
Math Tools Pairing Channels, 104
button, 78 PAL, 130, 131
Specifications, 286 Panel setup, 280
Use, 79 Save, 60
Mathcad, 194, 199, 200, 256 Recall, 61
MATLAB, 194, 201 Panels button, 25, 52, 60
Maxima (roof), 151 Parameter, 72
Maximum parameter, 182 Buffer, 228, 232
Maximum population (maxp), 223, 243 Choosing, 179
Mean parameter, 182 Cursors, 211, 223
Customizing, 172

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002

308
Index

function, 2 Processors, 279


Histogram, 222, 229, 230 Propagation Delay, 178
List, 179-185, 229
Symbols, 75 Q
Turn off, 74
Value Calculation, 208 Qualified Trigger, 124
Pass/ Fail, 65, 118, 173 State, 124, 125
Actions invoked, 173 Edge, 124, 126
Changing an action, 175 QuickZoom, 4
Test on a Mask, 174
Passive Probe R
Calibration, 40
Pattern Trigger, 124, 132, 133, 134 Random Interleaved Sampling (RIS), 102, 279
Bi-level, 134 Setup, 105
Peak-to-Peak parameter (pkpk), 183 Range parameter, 248
Peak, Histogram, 230, 231 Real, Real+ Imaginary, Imaginary, 81
Peaks (pks), 246 Real-time clock, 32
Percentile (pctl), 245 Rearm a Trigger, 46
Period parameter, 183 modes, 46
Persistence, 51 Rear Panel, 23, 261
mode, 71 Recall Waveform, 86
menu, 53 Rectangular windows, 81, 162
Setup, 53, 54 Relative mode, 63, 68, 69, 71
Phase, 81 Remote Control, 280
Parameter, 183 (RC) Assistant, 189, 191
Plot, 90 Remote Setup, 195, 263
Trends, 165 Repetitive Sampling, 154
Points parameter, 183 Rescale, 153
Population, See Histogram Reset button, 218
Position knob, 31, 36, 214 Return, Product, 16
Post-trigger delay, 101 RIS, See RandomInterleavedSampling
Power Density, 81 Rise 20-80% (r20-80%), 184
Power Off, 20 Rise at level (r@ level), 184
Power Source, 20 Rise time, 176, 177, 184
Power Spectrum, 80, 82 Rising Edge Duration equation, 177
Power Up, 22 Roll mode, 102
PowerMeasure Package, 288 Roof (maxima), 151
Preferences Menu Root Mean Square (rms), 185
File Name, 92 RS-232-C, 89, 90, 189, 190, 257, 280, 281
Mass Storage, 91 Runt Trigger, 135
Pre-trigger delay, 101
Print, 90 S
Print Screen button, 90, 107, 280 Safe Environment, 19
Probes, 285 Safety Symbols, 18
ProBus, 38, 41 Sampling

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002

309
Index

Choosing a mode, 103 TV, 130, 131


Clock, 105, 106, 108 Software applications, 17
Externally, 108 Software Options menu, 26
Repetitive, 154 Special Modes menu, 26, 27
Setup, 105 Specifications, 282-290
Single-shot, 37, 101 Spreadsheet,
Saturation, 52, 53, 56, 140 Save Waveform to, 194, 195-197, 256
Save and Recall Plot Waveform in, 198
Panel Setups, 60 Standard Deviation (sdev), 185
Waveforms, 85 Standard Display, 71
Scale, 214 Standard Math, 77
Setting, 219 Standard Parameter, 73
ScopeExplorer, 17, 189, 190, 256, 271 Standard Time, 73
Features, 278 Standard Voltage, 73
Using, 277 Status Report, 87
Scope Status button, 25, 49, 87, 106, 107 Memory Used, 87
Screen Saver, 26 Stop button, 46, 113, 117
SECAM, 130, 131 Store Waveform, 85, 193
Search, 57 Summed Average, 83, 84, 153
Sequence mode, 9, 103 Symbols,
Setup, 106 Safety, 18
Status Summary, 107 Parameter, 75
Setup and Hold delay, 178
Setup button, 37, 44, 105, 113, 117, 127, 162 T
Setup Storage, 286
Sigma parameter, 249 TCP/ IP, 263, 264, 265, 266
Signal-to Noise Ratio (SNR), 155, 156 Threshold levels, 176
Signal Processing Specifications, 286 Time/ div knob, 33, 162
Single mode button, 46, 55, 67 Time, 56
Single-shot sampling, 37 Standard Parameter, 73
Setup, 105 Time (Frequency) cursors, 63, 71
and Dropout Trigger, 127 Time and frequency field, 33
Slew Rate trigger, 10, 136 Time at level (t@ level), 185
Slope Timebase
Determining, 45, 119 System, 283
SMART Trigger, 43, 113, 279 Setup, 37, 105
Dropout, 127, 128 Timestamp, 56
Edge, 43, 44 Top parameter, 185
Glitch, 113-117 Total Population (totp), 250
Interval, 120, 121 Transfer data, 189, 190
menu, 10, Transparent, 59
Pattern, 124, 132, 133 Trend,
Qualified, 124-126 Calculating, 168
Runt, 135 Data Acquisition sequence, 168
Slew Rate, 136 feature, 165

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002

310
Index

Plotting, 165 Virtual Front Panel feature, 256


Positioning, 166 Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), 257, 271, 276
Reading, 167 Voltage, 56
Trigger Standard Parameter, 73
configuration field, 33 Volts/ div knob, 34
Controlling, 43 Von Hann (Hanning), 81, 162
delay, 33
Dropout, 127, 128 W
Edge, 43, 44
Glitch, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117 W'form+ Text, 52
icons, 46 Warranty, 15, 289
Interval, 120, 121 WaveAnalyzer Option (WAVA), 77, 205, 287
level, 33, 48 Setup for Histograms, 205
level, determining, 45 Waveform History, 6, 8
Level knob, 44, 117 Waveform Mask
Pattern, 124, 132, 133 Making, 175
Qualified, 124, 125, 126 Waveform Math, See alsoMath, 78
Rearm, 46 Waveform Memory, 286
Runt, 135 Wave Storage button, 193
Setup, 44 Wavepilot, 1
Slew Rate, 136 button, 65, 67, 73, 82, 171, 173, 205
SMART, See alsoSMA RT Trigger, 43, 279 menu, 65
Source, 48, 116, 121, 122, 123, 125, 129 Wave Storage button, 85
status, 49 Width parameter, 185
status field, 33 Window Trigger, 47
System, 279, 284 Wrap (file naming), 96
TV, 130, 131
Window, 47 X
Turn off
Cursors, 65 XAMN parameter, 186
Parameters, 74 XAMX parameter, 186
TV Trigger, 130, 131 X Coordinate of xx'th Peak (xapk), 251
XY Display, 64, 148
Setup, 146
U
Undershoot, 40 Z
User Preferences
Customize File Names, 92 Zoom
Display, 51, 142, 143 knob, 31, 36, 214
Sounds, 27 Multi-Zoom, 34, 36
Utility Button, 26, 27, 39, 71, 89, 91, 189, 191, 263 a trace, 36
Segmented traces, 225
Specifications, 285
V
View Waveform, 31

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002

311
Index

WR2-OM-E Rev C ISSUED: January 2002

312

You might also like